SIGNALS MANUAL: THE R-401 RADIO RELAY STATION

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
• Release Decision: RIPPUB
• Original Classification: S
• Document Page Count: 248
• Document Creation Date: December 23, 2016
• Document Release Date: August 14, 2013
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: October 1, 1963
• Content Type: REPORT

Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
TOR
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
This material contains intorttutien afiEstins the National Defense of the United States within the meaning of the Espionage Laws, 11_50X1
IS, U.S.C. Seca. 793 and 794, the transmission or revttiok obwilith iry manner to an unauthorized person Is prohibited by
COUNTRY Poland
REPORT
SUEJEC; Signals Manual: The R-401 Radio DATE DISTR. 1 October 1963
Relay Station
DATE OF
INFO.
PLACE &
DATE ACQ.
?THIS IS UNEVALUATED
NO. PAGES
REFERENCES RD
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
INFORMATION.
SOURCE GRADINGS ARE DEFINITIVE.
APPRAISAL OF CONTENT IS TENTATIVE.
.4
50X1
I. Attached is a Polish military manual authorized
for use in the Polish Armed Forces on 26 February 1962 by Colonel '
Edward Holynski, Chief of the Signals Corps. The Polish classi-
fication of the document is SECRET. ,,The R-401, which is of Soviet .
production, is currently being int'rOduced into the Polish Armed50X1A-IUM
Forces.
? S-E-C-R-R-T
50X1-H UM
5
4
OROUP 1
mectunrn Yaws AUTOMATIC
DOW NonAm NO AND
OrZLAW3IFICATIOH
ITA117-1 I ARMY If NAVY L I AIR I TNSA ?
DIA
I I AID I
50X1 -HUM
(Notot Washington distribution indicate's! by "X", Floid distribution by "*".)
3
, 2
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 .x1
SECRET
? Utt_S.S.R.
Am/4ILARY
50X1 -HUM
'MINISTRY OF NATIONAL DEFENSE
SECRET
SIGNALS MANUAL
THE R-401 RADIO RELAY STATION
0
PUBLICATION OF TEE ELNISTRY OF NATIONAL DEFENCE
1962
Warsaw, 26th February 1962.
alDMI No. 022/Laczn. aa?
I approve and introduce for use the " Signals Manual - The
R-401 Radio Relay Station".
CHEF OF THE CORPS OF SIGNALS
4.".. ?
SECRET
Golonel Edward HOLYNSKI
GROUP 1
Excluded train automatic
downgrading and
declassification
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
N-S) r_nv.4
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
OW SECRET
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. - Fundamentals of multi-channel communication
with frequency division multiplexing.
II, - Description of the station equipment.
14 Purpose of the station and basic tactical
and technical data.
2. Modes of operation of the station,
3. Transceiver unit.
4.. Multiplexing unit,
5. Power supply unit.
6. Aerial and mast equipment.
III. - Pperation of the R-401 station.
1. Protection of the station against damage.
2. Choice of site for deployment of the station.
3. Selection of the radio relay route.
Selection of the operating frequencies.
5. Deployment and dismantling of the station.
6. Switching on, establishing communication, and
switching off the station. .
7. Checking the readiness of the equipment for
operation.
8. Use of the equipment when operating as a
terminal station.
9, Use of the equipment when operating as an
intermediate station.
10. Operation using the portable equipment.
11. Battery charging.
12. Instrument for the adjustment of the
telegraph channels and relays.
13. Possible faults and Methods of their
elimination.
Chapter IV. - Measurement of the basic parameters of the
station.
1.
Measurement
of the transmitter power. '
2.
Measurement
of the aerial feeder efficiency.
3.
Measurement
of the receiver sensitivity.
4. Determination of the operating level setting
error (the overall attenuation) in the
telephone channels, by means of the station
instruments.
5. Cross-talk measurement.
6. Telegraph distortion measurement.
SECRET
50X1-HUM
41111111111/111w
MI111111111?
/APPENDICES .....
Page
5
12
12
21
26
41
64
73
77
77
77
82
85
85
91
99
109
121
126
128
130
133
137
137
138
138
139
140
142
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
-3
APPENDICES
I. Safety Regulations.
2. Method of Inspection and Technical Control of the R-4.(1 Radio
Relay Station.
3. Voltage and Resistance Values in Blocks 1 and 2.
4. Power Consumption by the individual Circuits of one Half-Set
of the Station.
5. Table of rated Voltages and Currents of Valves used in the
Station.
6. Table showing the normal Current and Pulsation of the
Rectified Voltage in Block 3.
7. Results of Control Measurements.
8, Fire Prevention Instructions for the R-401 Station.
9. block layout of the R-401 Radio Relay Station,
10. Diagram of Connections in Block 1.
11. Circuit Diagram of Transmitter.
12, List of Transmitter Components.
13. Circuit Diagram of the HF Stages of the Receiver.
14. List of Components of HF Stages of the Receiver.
15. Circuit diagram of the IF Stages of the Receiver,
16. List of Components of IF Stages of the Receiver.
17. Circuit Diagram of the Telephone Portion of thelifultiplexing
Block.
18. List of Components of Telephone Portion of the Multiplexing
Block.
19. Circuit Diagram of the Telegraphic Portion of Multiplexing
Block.
20. List of Components of the Telegraphic Portion. of
Multiplexing Block.
21. Circuit Diagram of Anti-Interference Filter.
22. List of Components of the Anti-Interference Filter.
23. Circuit Diagram of Rectifier Block.
24.
List of
Circuit
List of
Circuit
List of
Circuit
List of
Circuit
List of
Circuit
Components
25. Diagram of
26. Components
27, Diagram of
28, Components
29. Diagram of
30. Components
31. Diagram of
32. Components
33. Diagram of
R-401 Radio Relay Station.
of Rectifier Block.
the Line Circuit Converter0
of the Line Circuit Converter.
Receiver Converter.
of Transmitter Converter.
Transmitter Converter.
of Transmitter Converter.
the Line Pane1.
of the Line Panel.
the Power Circuit of one Half-Set of the
34. List of Components of the Power Circuit of one Half-Set of
the R-401 Radio Relay Station,
35. Circuit Diagram of the Charging Panel.
36. List of Components of the Charging Panel.
37. Circuit Diagram of the Mains Attachment.
38. List of Components of the Mains Attachment.
41111k SECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
rkDeclassified
Commeng
411101ECRET
? 4 -
SOME ABBREVIATIONS
50X1-H UM
1. APCz Automatyczne podstrajanie dzestotliwosci.
Automatic frequency control (AFC).
2. Dz
Dzwonek.
Bell,
3, FMCz Filtr malej czestotliwosci.
Low frequency filter.
4. FP Filtr pasmnwy.
Band pass filter.
5. FTg Filtr telegraficzny.
Telegraph filter.
6. GZA Generator zewu akustycznego.
Audio calling signal generator.
7. NKT Nikrotelefon,
hicrotelephones telephone -handset.
8. N Neper. (1 Neper = 8.686 decibels).
9. OZA Odbiornik zewu akustycznego.
Audio calling signal receiver.
10. P
11. PN
12. PO
13, TrR
14. URN
15, UR
16, WPCz
17, WWCz
18. WMCz
19, ZZ
20, TF
21, TG
Przekaznik,
Relay.
Przekaznik nadawczy.
Transmitting relay.
Przekaznik offbiorczy.
Receiving relay..
Transformator roznicowy.
Differential transftrmer.
(Hybrid coil).
Uklad rozmowniczo wywolvwczy.
"Talk - call" unit,
Uklad rozwidleniowy.
Hybrid junction unit.
Wzmacniacz posredniej czestotliwosci.
Intermediate frequency amplifier.
Wzmacniacz wysokiej czestotliwosci.
High frequency amplifier.
Wzmacniacz malej czestotliwosci.
Low frequency amplifier.
Zmiennik zewu.
Calling signal converter.
Telefon(iczny).
Telephong-ic).
Telegraf(iczny).
Telegraph(-ic),
aikSECRET
aibs-
50X1-H UM
50X1-HUM
in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
11111,SECRET
-5
50X1 -HUM
CHAPTER I
FUNDANENTALS OF MULTI-CHANNEL CONMUNICATION
WITH FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING
Communication by means Cf a radio-relay is a novel method of
providing communication by radio, which differs substantially due to its
features and possibilities from the previously used methods. The design of
the radio-relay equipment permits the use of the radio-relay Channels in
connection with wire communication channels. DUB to this possibility, a
complox communication system can be set up, where the same terminal
equipment is used for both wire and radio links. With such a system a
subscriber, whose telephone set is connected to the exchange, can talk
through the wire links, or through the radio links, or through mixed wire
and radio links. Therefore the application of the radio-relay raises the
quality of the radio communication up to the level of a good quality wire
communication, at the same time preserving the fundamental advantage of
radio communication, namely good manoeuverability.
2. To obtain a more efficient use of the wire lines for long
distance communication, wide use is made of multiplexing (multi-channeling).
This means a simultaneous transmission of many conversations along a common
path. The multiplexing of radio links for the simultaneous transmission of
several conversations is widely applied in the radio-relay communication.
The principles of multi-channel communication by means of the radio-relay
with frequency division multiplexing will now be examined, taking as an
example the radio-relay station R-401.
3. The frequency band transmitted by the R-401 radio-relay station
is contained within the limits of 300 to 15000 q/s. Within this band there
are located two telephone channels, and two telegraph channels. The first
telephone channel is the natural voice frequency channel. The second
telephone channel - the carrier frequency channel - is an ultrasonic7100,
frequency channel, operating on the principle of the suppressed-carrier
/transmission.
SECRET mumarso 50X1 -HUN
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1
/
? ,
Declassified
arSECRET
50X1-HUM
transmission. Both telegraph Channels are also ultrasonic. In these
channels, the telegraph pulses are transmitted with the aid of frequency
modulated oscillations.
40 The suppressed-carrier transmission method of telephone
,
_-_-_
conversations consists of shifting the natural voice frequency band into the
_ . _
range of higher frequencies, and then transmitting it through the radio-
relay link. This is accomplished by special processes taking place on the
transmitting side, On the receiving side? the frequency band is submitted
to a reverse process, resulting jn the recovery of the original voice
frequency band of the telephone signal.
5. The process of shifting the voice frequency band into the
higher frequency range on the transmitting side is known as moaulationl and
the reverse process on the receiving side is known as de-mcdulation.
6. It is known that the telephone speech is sufficiently
intelligible even when the audio frequency band is reduced to a band
contained within the limits of 400-2500 c/s. An example of the relative
amplitudes of sinusoidal components of the telephone conversation frequency
band is given in Figure 1 a.
7. When the oscillations of a special oscillator (the sub-carrier
frequency oscillator) are modulated with a signal of the above frequency
band, the amplitude modulated oscillations frequency spectrum will contain
the following frequencies: sub-carrier frequency (the oscillator
frequency), and two side-bands (Figure i b).
8. The width of each side band equals the width of the modulating
signal band, and the particular frequencies are the sum of, or difference
between the oscillator frequency and the frequencies of the modulating
signal. For example the sub-carrier frequency of the R-401 radio-relay
station is fpn = 70..2.2Ls. Hence the lower side band contains frequencies
lying between 4900 and 7000 c/s (from fpn 2500 c/s to fpn7400 c/s), and
the upper side-band contains frequencies lying between 7800 and 9900 c/s
(from fpn + 400 to fpn + 2500 ?M. 1111111111.111. 50X1
cFrral?
/From.
50X1-HUM
in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
I
1 I
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001730151-0M
/
/
/
?
?
OW/SECRET
?7-.
9. From Figure 1 b it follows that the distribution of amplitudes
in the upper side-band corresponds exactly to the amplitudes distribution
within the natural band of the telephone speech. In the lower side-band the
higher frequency components correspond to the lower frequency components of
the natural band, and vice-versa - the lower frequency components of the
lower side-band correspond to the higher frequency oomponents of the natural
band. In other words, the distribution of the component oscillations
amplitudes within the lower side-band is in inverse ratio to the distribution
in the natural band.
10. Frequently, to make the best use of the frequency band which can
be transmitted by the radio-relay, only one of the side-bands is used for
the transmission of speech. In the R-401 radio-rely only the lower side-
band is transmitted. The sub-carrier frequency serves here only for the
purpose of producing the amplitude modulated oscillations, The sub-carrier
frequency oscillations, together with the upper side-band components are
subsequently attenuated by a filter. The telephony system based on the
principle of the single side-band, suppressed-carrier transmission presents
the advantage that the frequency band width, required for the transmission
of the speech signal, is equAl to the signal band width only.
11. The frequency band transmitted by the R-401 radio-relay station
is shown in Figure 2,
12. The blodk diagram shown in Figure 3 explains the principle of
frequency division multiplexing in the radio-relay link.
13. The signal from the subscriberls microphone in the first telephone
channel, passes through the amplitude limiter OA, and is applied to the low
frequency filter FIA0z. Through this filter pass only frequencies below
2500 c/s. This eliminates the possibility of interference in the remaining
channels during the operation of the first telephone channel.
14. The signal from the microphone of the second telephone channel,
after passing through the amplitude limiter OA, is applied to the modulator.
- /Abkthe
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
,
r 1
T 1 I
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010-001-'5" JIV1
/
Ai., btLICL I
?
- 8-.
At the output of the modulator is a band-pass filter FP1) -which transmits
only the lower side-band frequencies (4900-7000 c/s) and substantially
attenuates all the other frequencies, eliminating the possibility of
interference in the other channels, From the output of the filters FMOz and
FPI signals of both telephone channels are applied to the input of the
modulation amplifier of the. -? ??,_.. ? _ _ . .
15. The amplitude limiters OA at the input of each telephone channel
limit the level of the incoming signal to a definite value in order to
prevent the overloading of the following channels, and to reduce the ,
possibility of cross-talk between the Channels. As the limiters are non-
linear elements, they cause signal distortions in the telephone channels.
However, it turns out in practice that the non-linear distortions caused by
the limiters affect much less the quality of communication, than cross-talk
between the channels in the absence of limiters.. On the block diagram a
dotted line is drawn around the second telephone channel elements which in
the carrier telephony equipment are known as the ',;ransmitter.
16. The block diagram explaining the principle of separation of
particular channels on the receiving side) is shown in Figure 4.
17. The low frequency filter FMCzi? located at the input of the first
telephone channel, transmits to the subscriber, from the whole frequency
band of the received signal (Figure 2)0 only the first Channel frequencies
(natural voice frequency band). It does not pass frequencies. of the
remaining channels.
18. The band-pass filter FP10 located at the input of the second
telephone channel, transmits from the whole frequency band received, only
frequencies corresponding to the lower side-band. of this channel, i.e, only
the band 4-900-7000 q/s. Signals of the pass band frequency enter the de-
modulator (Dem.), where they are transformed into the natural telephone
speech frequency band. The demodulator consists here of a cuproxide
rectifier, which is a non-linear element.
lift-SECRET
411111111111101
41111114:19. 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
alp SECRET
50X1 -HUM
194 When to the non-linear element is applied a signal containing
lower side-band frequencies (fb), and a sub-carrier frequency fpn = 7400 c/ss
generated by a local oscillator, then at the output of this element there
appear, beside the fundamental frequencies, also their harmonics, and the
combined frequencies of fb and fila (Figure 5). The frequency components,
which are the difference of f n flo, correspond to the voice frequendy band
transmitted by the second telephone channel. The low frequency band filter
(low pass filter) FMCz2 at the output of the demodulator attenuates all the
higher frequencies beyond the voice frequency band transmitted through the
second telephone channel. From the output of this filter, the signal
containing voice frequencies, after being amplified by the amplifier Ws is
sent to the subscriber. On the block diagram a dotted line is drawn around
the part of the circuit which in the carrier telephony system is known as
the receiver.
20. In Figure 6 is shown a simplified block diagram of the .second
telephone channel of the R-401. station.. For the transition from the four-
terminal multiplex system into the two-terminal subscriber's line is used a
differential transformer 2Tybrid coi27. The principle of its operation is
as follows,
21. The currents of the natural voice frequency band from the
demodulator flow through the primary winding of the differential transformer
TrR into the sUbscriber's line, and simultaneously into the balancing
network Rn. The balancing network is so designed that its impedance is
equal to the input impedance of the subscriber's line. Therefore currents
through the balancing network and through the subscriber's line are equal.
As these currents flow through the primary winding in opposite directions,
the resultant magnetic flux in the core of the differential transformer TrR
is zero. In consequence, no electromotive force is induced, in the
secondary winding of the transformers which is connected to the modulr,tor
Input, and the telephone signals directed to the subsdriber do net enter
into one's awn transmitter input. On the other hand, currents from the
OW SECRET
/subscr
50X1
4,06*01100
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
'Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
4IP
4111P4 SECRET
- 10 -
50X1 -HUM
subscriber microphone flaw in the same direction through both halves of the
differential transformer primary winding. An EMS is therefore induced in the
secondary winding, which is then applied to the input of the modulator.
22, The above multiplexing method- is used in the R-401 station.
23. We will now examine the principle of telegraphy with the aid of
the frequency modulated ospillations.as used in both telegraph channels of
- -
the R-401 station. The positive telegraph pulses arriving from the line
develop alternating current signals of a frequency fl, and the negative
pulses, or zero current pulses develop signals of a frequency f2. Conversion
of the d.c. pulses into the a. c, signals is done with the aid of the
transmitting relcv which controls the generator oscillations, At the
instant of the transition of the transmitting relay arm from ane contact to
the other, the generator frequency has an average value of fo = f1+f2 .
2
24, During the transmission of positive telegraph pulses, the
frequency fo is increased by the amount ft, and during the transmission
of the negative or zero current pulses, the frequency drops by the 'same
amount. The amount of the frequency increase ft is known as the
frequency deviation of the generator. In this manner, by changing the
frequency of the generator oscillations, the telegraph signals can be
transmitted, without interrupting the oscillations of the generator.
25. The width of the telegraph channel frequency band with frequency
modulated oscillations depends upon the coefficient of modulation
(modulation index) mf which is expressed as the ratio: '
ft 2A ft
mf= ----77-
where: F = fundamental telegraph signalling frequency, equal to one half
of the telegraph signalling speed expressed in bauds.
26. In the R-401 station the frequency deviation of both telegraph
channels is the same, and equals A. ft = 300 q/s. As the frequency
deviation is always constant, the frequency band width is determined by the
highest telegraph signalling speed which, for the telegraph channels of the
411111.
crDFT
/R-401
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
I)
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
50X1 -HUM
R-401 station, equals 50 bauds. At this signalling speed, the frequency
band occupied by each telegraph channel is 800 c/s.
270 The block diagram of the circuit converting the d.c, telegraph
signal pulses into frequency modulated oscillations is shown in Figure 3.
Pulses from the telegraph transmitters connected to the inputs of the
channels, activate the transmitting relays EN, which in turn control the
oscillation frequency of the generator 0.1 or 0.2,
28. The frequency modulated oscillation5 pass from the generator
through the band-pass filter FP2 (or FP3 of the second channel) into the
input of the modulatOr amplifier of the transmitter.
29, The spectrum of the telegraph and telephone frequency channels,
and their position within the frequency band transmitted by the R.-401
station, is shown in Figure 2. The frquency bands of the individual
channels of the station are so distributed along the frequenCy spectrum as
to minimise the possibility of cross-talk between the channels.
30. The block diagram of the frequency modulated telegraph signal
receiving circuit is shown in Figure 4. The frequency modulated
oscillations arriving from the receiver, pass through the filter FP2 ,(or
FP3) their amplitude is limited, and they are then amplified. The purpose
of the amplitude limiter was discussed above.
31. The amplitude limited and amplified frequency mpaulated
oscillations corresponding to2the telegraph signals- are applied to the
frequency detector Aiscriminato2.7 D, composed of two resonant circuits
connected in series, The resonant frequency of one circuit equals fo 4. ft,
and the resonant frequency of the second circuit equals fo - ft. With, the
aid of this detector the frequency modulated oscillations aro converted into
amplitude modulated oscillations. They are then rectified by the cuproxide
rectifiers Pr. The rectified currents flow through the windings of the
polarised receiving relay PO whose arm reproduces the d.c0 telegraph signal
pulses, which are then transmitted through the line to the telegr-.1b-,--2:-.
ux1 -HUM
receivers e 50X1 -HUM
SECRET
/CHAPIER
?
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
V)
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
411!IISECRET
- 12 -
CHAPTER II
DESCRIPTION OF THE STATION EQUIPMENT
1. Pur ose of the Station and basic Tactical and
Technical Data
50X1-HUM
32, The R-401 radio-relay station serves primarily for the.mainte-
nance of communication between command posts, and as a branch link from
large, multi-channel radio-relay stations. In addition, the station can
be used as an incermediate station for the wire lines, and also for other
purposes.
Equipment of the station
33. The equipment of the R-401 radio-relay station is located in a
special body of the GAZ,-63 truck (Figure 7). The weight of the truck)
including the body, the equipment, the accessories and ,fuel9 is 5400 kgs.
34. Each radio-relay station is equipped with two identical half-
sets. Each half-set is composed of the following basic assemblies: the
transmitter-receiver unit (Block 1) the multiplexing unit (Block 2)9 the
rectifier unit (Block 3)9 the line panel, the battery charging panel, the
petrol-driven generator for battery charging, six storage batteries 5 NI-45,
the aerial, the mast with guy-ropes, and two coaxial aerial cables ffeeder.17.
In addition, the station outfit also includes: an instrument for the
adjustment of channels and telegraph relays, a mains supply attachment, a
telephone instrument TAI-43, spare parts, and auxiliary equipment.
35; The blocks 19 2 and 3 of each half-set are fixed in a metal
rack (Figure 8). The racks are attached to the table and to the rear wall
of the truck body with the aid of shock absorbers. The lay-out of the.
equipment in the truck is shown in Figure 9.
411111ECRET
/ 36,
9684
50X1-HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
ri)
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
WPSECRET
- 13 -
50X1 -HUM
36. The design of the equipment and the wiring of the station makes.
possible speedy dismantling of the equipment and removing it for operation
outside the truck, and also its speedy replacement in the truck. The
removable equipment consists of: the transmitter-receiver unit, the
multiplexing unit, two storage batteries 5 1110-45 the aerial in its packing)
a mast hoist, a set of guy-ropes in their packing, the mast components in .
their packing, the line panel, a telephone hand set, and connecting cables
in their packing. When removing the equipment? the units, 1. and 2, and the
line panel shoold be placed in a special cover.. The weight of the
removable equipment (Figure 10) is about 200 kgs.
Basic Equipment Data - RaKE:3_2f
Communication
37. In a moderately undulating, afforested and flat terrain, the
range of communication between two stations is up to 45 kns. With two
more relay (intermediate) stations it is possible to Communicate over a
range of 120 kms. In a flat open terrain the range between the stations
can be increased.
38. It, should be borne in mind that when using intermediate
(retransmission) stations, each retransmitting section extending the
radio-relay route causes an increase of the noise in individual channels.
Therefore, in order to ensure normal conditions of operation of the radio-
relay, it is necessary to increase the received signal levels at the
individual stations. This can be obtained by reducing the distance between
the stations, as compared with the distance between two terminal stations
(without any relay stations). This explains the fact that with two relay
stations the range of communication is less than treble the range between
two terminal stations.
1:13_7e.eassy_s:4m
39. ?The station operates in the metric wave range (4.55 - 4.29 m.),
50X1 -HUM
/ at frequencies...
4111WIECRE'T
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
111110" SECRET
""'
50X1
50X1-HUM
at frequencies from 66 to 69.975 Eb/s. This range is subdivided into 54
fixed operating wavelengths, at 75kc. intervals. Operating wave NO. 1
corresponds to the frequency of 66 likVs.
400 The tuning assembly (of the transmitter and of the receiver),
which has a scale and 4 pointer, serves for tuning the station and for
setting it to any desired operating wavelength.
41. The station provides the means for simultaneous duplex operation
with ',:wo telephone channels, ani two telegraph. channels.
42. The output of each telephone channel can be connected to a two-
wire (single pair) or to a four-wire (double pair) line. In other words,
the transmission and the reception in each channel can be carried out either
through a common circuit, or through two separate circuits. In both cases
in each telephone channel, the magneto calling signals can pass over in
both directions. There is also provision for a rlecondary multiplexing,
? .....
(re-multiplexing) of the telephone channels by the telegraph channels with ?
the aid of the carrier telegraphy equipment type B-313. As the second
telephone channel is a carrier channel, its multiplexing with the aid of
the P-313 equipment results in a slightly inferior communication, as
compared with the first telephone channel. The telephone channels can also
be used for the transmission Of fixed images with the aid of tele-photography
equipment.
43. The telegraph channels can work with uni-directional pulses of
the telegraph set ST-35, as well as with the bi-directional pulses of the
Baudot telegraph system. With the aid of the differential line trans-
formers, supplied with the station, it is possible to operate the telegraph
communication through two-wire lines connected to the telephone channels.
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
441110 SECRET
- 15
50X1 -HUM
44. The multiplexing equipment of the station permits an external
multiplexing of the radio-line with the aid of the carrier telephony sets
P-310 and P-3121 When the external multiplexing sets are being used, the
second telephone channel and both telegraph channels are switched off. The
firs telephone channel operates. as usual.
45. When the station operates with its own multiplexing equipment,
any channel can be extracted from the intermediate "station. The relaying
Lye-transmission/ of the remaining channels is carried out on low. frequencies
(natural or carrier frequencies). During external multiplexing operation
witi the aid of the sets P-310 and P-312, only the first telephone channel
r- -;
can be extracted from the intermediate LyepeateIr station.
46. The station telephone channel outputs can be connected to the
telephone channels of the wire or radio-relay systeMs.
Characteristics (s ecifications of the channels
47. The basic characteristic values of a telephone channel are:
the rated input and output levels, the intelligible cross-talk level (from
other channels), the magnitude of the non-linear distortions and frequency
iiineax7 distortions, and the noise level at the channel output.
48. The noise level in the radio-relay telephrne channel depends
upon the high frequency signal levels received by each station, and upon the
number of stations in any given link.
49. At the above given ranges between the stations, the psophometrie
noise level in the telephone channels, including the cross-talk level, does
not exceed 5 mV,
50. With a two-wire input to the telephone channels, and at the
input level of - 1 lq&eper.g, the absolute cross-talk level over one
repeater section does not exceed - 7 Nb With three repeater sections there
is practically no cross-talk. The operation of the telegraph channels
50X1 -HUM
IOW SECRET
/ (both am channels,..,
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
-
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
50X1
50X1-HUM
(both own channels and the channels obtained as a result of the secondary
multiplexing with the aid of the P-313 unit), does not in practice cause
an interference in the telephone channels.
51. Each telephone channel transmits a speech frequency band ftom
WO to 2500 c/s, with an attenuation of the extreme frequencies of this
band not exceeding 0.4 N.
52. The non-linear distortion coefficient of the telephone channels
with two-wire input, and an input level of - 1 1T, does not exceed loy; for
one rcpeater section.
53. The non-linear distortion coefficient of the first telephone
channel with a four-wire input (42)1 and an input level of - 004N does
not exceed 470 for one repeater section.
54. The input and output impedence of the radio-relay telephone
channels is 600 ohms. The rated levels of the telephone cnannels, measured
at a frequency of 800 c/s9 are as follows:
- for a two-wire input: input level - 1.0 ltio (285 MV);
output level - 2.0 El, (105 10);
- for a four-wire input with a magneto calling signal repeater
(4TF)g the input and the output levels are - 1.24-N (190 mV);
for a four-wire input without a magneto calling signal repeaterr
the input and the output levels are - 064 N, (519 mV),
55. At the rated supply Voltages it is possible to adjust the
attenuation of the telephone channels with the aid of the measuring instru-
ments, with an accuracy of 0.2 N.
56. The quality Of the telegraph channels can essentially be
determined by two parameters - the maximum telegraph signalling speed, and
the coefficient of the telegraph signals distortions. The telegraph
channels of the R-401 station make it possible to telegraph speed at a rate
of 50 bauds. At this speed, the distortions of the telegraph signals
001. SECRET
50X1-HUMI
/ for a link....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
?
40SECRET
- 17--
?
50X1-HUM
for a link consisting of two intermediate repeater stations and two
terminal stations, do not exceed 10%.
57. The lack of constancy of the frequency response from 3.5 to
15 kc/s., with external multiplexing does not exceed, for one repeater
section, the limits of + 0.2 to - 0.5 N9 in respect of the reference level
at 9 kc/s. The rated levels of the channel with external multiplexing
ares input level - + 0.4 N; output level - not less than - 2 N. The
input and the output impedances of this channel are 1000 ohms.
The transmitter output power
58. The output power of the transmitter at rated power supply
voltages, and average values of the output stage valve parameters, is not
less than 2 W. With the batteries voltage drop to 11 V9 oi with the mains
voltage drop of 10%, the transmitter output 'power should be not less than
1.3 W.
.Receiver sensl.tivltz
59. The receiver sensitivity of the station for both telephone
channels, at a frequency deviation of 6 kc/s, at the rated output level,
and a signal-to-noise ratio of 20 at the telephone channel output, should
be not less than 2 microvolts. With the power supply voltages fluctuating
within the limits of ? 10% the receiver sensitivity remains practically
constant.
Receiver selectivity,
60. The image signal attenuation is not less than 10 N for the first
intermediate frequency, and not less than 11 N for the second intermediate
frequency.
61. The attenuation of the intermediate frequency signals is not
less than 11.5 N.
-1111111,SECREIT
/ 62.
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
-411WSECRET
- 18 -
50X1 -HUM
62. When the receiver is de-tuned from 75 kc/s to 300 kc/s, the
sensitivity drops not less than 9.2 N. When the receiver is de-tuned
over 300 kc/s,,the sensitivity drops not less than 11.5 N. The band=pasg
Vi] of 0.5 is 48 kc/s.
Freguencz stability of the receiver and the
transmitter
63. The frequency stability of the transmitter and the receiver
ensures the establishing of the communication without searching for the
correspondent, and also the maintenance of communication without the necessity
of manual re-tuning.
64. The cumulative error of the scale calibration and the tuning of
the transmitter and receiv3r to the operating frequency does not exceed
? 6 kc/s. When the valves of the master oscillator, or the modulator
in the transmitter, or the valves of the heterodyne oscillator, or the auto-
matic frequency control stage in the receiver, have been changed - it is
necessary to re-calibrate the equipment, with the aid of the quartz cali-
brator of the station.
65. The correction of the receiver and transmitter calibration should
be repeated periodically during the technical inspections of the station.
66. After the switching on of the transmitter and receiver, during
the warming up period of the valves and circuit elements of the transmitter
master oscillator, and the receiver first heterodyne oscillator, their
frequency is changing. About 15 minutes after the switching on, the fre-
quency of the transmitter and of the heterodyne oscillator of the receiver
become stabilized, and do not vary any more. The de-tuning of the trans-
mitter and of the heterodyne oscillator of the receiver one minute after
switching on does not exceed 3 kc/s.
67. When the power supply voltages fluctuate within the limits of
105"0 from the rated value, the frequency fluctuations of the transmitter
and of the first heterodyne oscillator do not .exceed 3.5,Jcols.
SECRET
/ 68.
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
-iii SECRET
- 19 -
50X1-HUM
68. The thermal frequency factor (TWCz) of the transmitter and of
the first heterodyne oscillator of the receiver does not exceed - 4,>(10.
69. ,After communication has been established, the automatic
frequency control circuit of the receiver should be switched on. This
reduces the receiver de-tuning, in respect of the opposite station trans-
mitter, almost ,six times, if de-tuning does not exceed one half of the
receiver band-pass width (_ 25 kc/s).
The Aerial apilasp.siat
70. Por the transmission and reception of high frequency signals,
the R-401 station uses two separate "Yazd." type aerials with mutually
perpendicular polarization, assembled as a single cruciform unit. The
horizontal and the vertical aerials, which form one unit, are installed on
top of a collapsible mast 14.5 m. high.
71. The beam width angle of the horizontal radiation pattern main
lobe, measured between two half-power points is:
- for the vertical aerial - about 750 (Figure 73);
- for the horizontal aerial - about 550 (Figure 74).
The directional gain of the aerial in respect of a half-wave dipole is not
less than 6 db. The reciprocal attenuation between the horizontal and
the vertical aerials is not less than 38 db.
72. Aerials are connected to the receiver and the transmitter by co-
axial feeders type R1-1, 25 m. long.
Power Supply
73. The station-can be powered from storage batteries, or from
127/220 V a.c. mains. Each half-sot is equipped with three groups of
storage batteries, consisting of two batteries each, type 5 NIT-45.
74. One group of storage batteries can supply continuously one
half-set for 8 hours.
4116 SECRET
/ 75.
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 20 -
50X1 -HUM
75. Power drawn by one half-set from storage batteries isz
- during operation of?the whole half-set - not more than 75 W;
- during stand-by duty (only receiver is energised) - not more than
35W.
76. Power drawn by one Half-set from the mains is:
- during operation of the whole half-set - not more than 150 W;
- during stand-by duty - not more than 65 W.
77. During operation of both half-sets at maximum load (calling, scale
lighting, truck indoor lighting) the total power drawn by the station
from a.c. mains is not more than 340 W.
78. Fluctuations of the supply voltages within t 10% of the rated
value do not affect the normal operation of the station. The storage
batteries are charged by means of a mobile petrol-driven generator, type
PES-0.75.
79. The anode and screen grid circuits of the valves, and the line
circuits of the Baudot,telegraph sets, are supplied from:
- a vibrator converter, when using the battery power supply;
- rectifiers, when using the a.c. mains supply.
20.12yment and dismantlinp of the Station
80. The time required for the deployment and for dismantling of one
intermediate station (erection and dismantling of two aerial and mast
assemblies) by operating personnel consisting of 5 men, does not exceed
one hour.
81. The design of the aerial and mast equipment permits the deploy-
ment'of the station on relatively small sites, and also at night.
Other data of the Station
82. (1) The dimensions of the truck and body:
- length 5550 mm.
width 2240 mm.
height 2990 mm.
L-1
ZEndistinct cop/
/(
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
PerSECRET
- 21 -
(2) Total petrol supply for the truck:
- petrol tank under the seat - 90 litres;
- petrol tank under the body - 105 litres;
(3)
Of this:
The total number of radio valves in one half-set is 30.
in the transmitter: 6 valves (5 type 12Z111, and one type 4PI1J);
in the receiver: 16 valves (12ZII);
in the multiplexing unit: 8 valves (12ZI).
50X1 -HUM
2, Modes of 02.9ration of the Station
83. The R-401 station can operate in three alternative ways: as
a terminal station, as an intermediate 27epeatei7 station, zJid as a main
repeater station. In addition, any half-set can operate on stand.- by duty
(only the receiver operates).
22.92:ation as a terminal station
84. A block diagram of the station operating as a terminal station
is shown in Figure 12,
? 85. The subscriber's telephones in the telephone channels are
connected though wire lines to the hybrid junction unit UR. The first
channel subscriber signal passes through the hybrid junction unit UR, through
the amplitude limiter OA, through the low frequency filter of the pass
band 0.4 to 2.5 -kc/s, and is ap lied to the modulation amplifier of the
radio-relay transmitter (Bloc11). Signals from this channel are applied
to the input of the modulation amplifier without frequency conversion.
86. The second channel subscriber's signal passes through the hybrid
junction unit to the input of the multiplexing unit transmitter, where the
input signal frequencies are converted into higher frequencies. After
? frequency conversion, and after passing through the 4.9 to 7.0 kc/s band-
pass filter, the signal, which now contains only the lower side-band
41111111kSECRET
50X1-HUM
/ frequencies...
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
frequencies: is applied to the input of the modulation amplifier of the
50X1-HUM
radio-relay transmitter.
87. The d.c. telegraph pulses, from the telegraph instruments
connected to the telegraph channels of the station, are applied to the
transmitting relay PN control the frequency of oscillations of the
generator G2 in the first channel, and of the generator G3 in the second
channel respectively. When the applied telegraph pulses are negative
(or no-current pulses), the frequency of the geLerator G2 oscillations in
the first telegraph channel is 8.5 kc/s. When the pulses are positive
(or current pulses), the oscillation frequency is 9.1 kc/s. The second
telegraph channel generator G3 generates oscillations of the frequency 12.2
and 12.8. kc/s respectively.
88. The frequency of oscillations of the generators G2 and G are in
3
this way modulated during the operation of the telegraph instruments.
89. The frequency modulated oscillations pass through the 8.4 to 9.2
kc/s band-pass filter in the first channel, and through the 12.1 to
12.9 kc/s band-pass filter in the second channel, into the input of the
modulation amplifier of the transmitter.
? 90. The signals of particular channels, shown in Figure 2, after
being amplified to a suitable level in the modulation amplifier, modulate
the high frequency oscillations of the master oscillator in the transmitter.
After further amplification, these oscillations are applied to the trans-
mitting aerial through a coaxial line.
91. The high frequency signals received from the other station are
fed through the coaxial line into the input of the receiver (Block 1).
In the receiver they are amplified and then submitted to a conversion
process in order to re-create the signals modulating the radio-relay
transmitter frequency of the frequency spectrum shown in Figure 2. After
0411111bSECRET
50X1-HUM
/ the conversion, 0004
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
41111,SECRET
50X1-HUM
the conversion, the signal passes from the output of the receiver into a
system of filters (Block 2) which distribute the component frequency bands
into particular channels.
90. The signal containing the natural speech frequency band of the
first telephone channel, after passing through the low frequency 0.4 to
2.5 kc/s band-pass filter, through the amplifier W$ and through the hybrid
junction unit UR, is sent to the subscriber.
93. The second telephone channel frequenv band, separated by the
4.9 to 7,0 kc/s band-pass filter, is applied to the receiver of the multi-
plexing unit, where it is converted into the original telephone speech
frequency band. After the conversion, the signal passes through the low-
pass filter, through the hybrid junction unit UR, and then is sent to the
subscriber.
94. . In order to carry out a telephone conversation from own station,
with the other radio-relay station or with a telephone exchange, use is
made of the talk-call unit. This unit can be connected to the appropriate
telephone channel.
95. The frequency modulated signals of the first telegraph channel,
after passing through the 8.4 to 9.2. kc/s band-pass filter for the first
telegraph channel, or after passing through the 12.1 to 12.9 kc/s band-pass
filter for the second telegraph channel, enter the appropriate telegraph
signal receiver, where they are converted into d.c. pulses. These pulses
pass through the windings of the polarised receiving reJays PO. The arms
of the receiving relays reproduce the d.c. pulses, and transmit these pulses
through the line to the receiving telegraph instruments,
96. With external multiplexing with the aid of the carrier telephony
sets P-310 and P-312, the R-401 station can operate only as a terminal
station in a four-wire systems i.e., with the separation of directions of
transmitting and receiving.
In this case, the station should be connected
50X1-HUN
/ as a terminal..:.
411111111111MRL
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000115
?
ECRET
? 24 ?
50X1-HUM
50X1-HUM
as a terminal station with external multiplexing.
97. The block diagram of the external multiplexing equipment connec-
tions is shown in Figure 13. This figure shows that in this case the first
telephone channel operation is similar to the operation with internal multi-
plexing equipment. On the trarismittlng side, the external multiplexing
equipment is connected to the input of the radio-relay transmitter modulation
amplifier through a vide-band transformer Tr6, and on the receiving side, it
is connected with the output of the receiver through the wide-band trans-
former .Tr7 (Block 1).
0 eration as an interme412,i2jrepeater)sstation.
The block diagram of the station when operating as intermediate
98.
station (repeater station) is shown in Figure 14. In this uase all the
channels of the station are connected for re-transmission (repeater)
operation.
99. As the station must re-transmit signals simultaneously in both
, directions, both half-sets must operate. The receivers and the. transmitters
of both half-sets are operating simultaneously, and in addition both tele-
phone channels are switched on for reception, so that the calling signals can
be received, and it is possible to cheek (monitor) the telephone channels
for quality of communication. The telegraph channels are connected for re-
transmission, but their power supply SOUTOOS are not switched on.
.100. For the re-transmission of channels a four-wire system is used.
From the receiver output of one half-set, signals of all the channels are
applied to the transmitter input of the second half-set through the filters
of the respective channels. When a calling signal comes in through an
telephone channel, the intermediate station operator switches this channel
to the terminal station operation, and connects the "talk-call" unit URW,
which allows him to carry out the conversation.
SECRET
50X1-HUM
/ 101.
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
111VSECRET
25
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
101. The block diagram of an intermediate station with external
multiplexing using the carrier telephony sets P-310 and P-312, is shown in
Figure 15. For re-transmission of a channel with external multiplexing,
the second telephone channel and both telegraph channels of each half-set
are disconnected. There is no change in the re-transmission of the first
telephone channel, as shown in the diagram in Figure 14.
For channel
re-transmission with external multiplexing a four-wire system is used. In
each half-set, the signals of this channel pass through a wide-band trans-
forner.
Operation as a main re eater station
102. An intermediate. (repeater) station is called the main repeater
station when some of the channels are extracted for local use.
In this case
the extracted telephone and telegraph channels are reconnected at the inter-
mediate station for terminal operation, (In Figure 14 these connections
are shown with broken lines). Telephone and telegraph channels which are
not extracted, operate in the re-transmission system. (In Figure 14
connections for this case are shown with a continuous line). The "talk,-
call" unit of each half-set of the main repeater station permits conversation
through the extracted channel, and also monitoring of the re-transmission
channels.
Station connected for st.11=hy_yestplilpja
103. In addition to the modes of operation described above, any half-
set of the terminal or intermediate station can be connected for reception
only. In this case only the receiver of the radio-relay and both telephone
channels are in operation, so that it is possible to receive the calling
signal from the distant station.
104. When an audio frequency signal (800 c/s) is received, the
receiver of the audio calling signal OZA in one of the telephone channels wil
50X1 -HUM
/ come into...
50X11
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
50X1-HUM
come into operation and will energise the bell. On hearing the bell, the
operator switches on the half?set (switches on his transmitter), and answers
the cell of the distant station,
3. Transceiver Unit
105. In the transceiver unit (Block 1) are located the following
basic elements: the radio transmitter, the radio receiver, and the
vibrator converters of the transmitter and the receiver. The description
of ea ;h. element is given below. The voltages and currents required for
the 3upply of the particular circuits, and the operating data for the valves
of the transceiver unit are given in Appendices 4 and 5.
The nonstruction of the unit
106. The transceiver unit is assembled on a siluminum cast base, with
the front panel attached to it with bolts.
107. The external view of this unit is shown in Figures 17$ 18, 19
and 20.
108. The individual elements of the unit are assembled in separate
partitions divided into several compartments. The design of the unit
permits the rapid replacement of any of the transmitter and receiver valves.
109. The transceiver unit honsing is made of duraluminium sheet.
In the rear wall of the housing there are holes for the cable connectors,
and on the side walls ? holes giving access to the semi?variable capacitors
5rimmers27 serving for frequency correction fine tuninI of the transmitter
and the receiver, and also to the potentiometers serving for the adjustment
of the ANzrA-F.97 circuit.
110. The size of the transceiver unit including the housing is:
370X215g415 mm. Weight of the unit: 26 kg.
/ The transmitter
50X1-HUM
50X1
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 JM
?
JC%?11C I
27
The transmitter
111. The station transmitter is assembled in a separate frame.
Access to all the elements of the transmitter is possible without removal
of the frame from the chassis of the unit. The transmitter dial is fixed
directly on the shaft of its tuning Mechanism. The hairline of the scale
is fixed to the front panel of Block 1.
112. On tuning the transmitter, the rotary motion of the dial is
changed by means of .a suitable threaded shaft into the progressive motion of
411111 the tuning elements.
?
113. Master oscillator tuning within the frequency range i9 obtained
by varying the distributed capacity 035 of the oscillator grid circuit coil.
This capacitance is varied by the movement of a ceramic core of high di-
electric constant ermittivitil inside the coil. Circuits of all the other
stages are tuned inductively. Inductance of these circuits is varied by
means of copper rings slid inside the coils. All the circuits are tuned
simultaneously with the aid of a tuning mechanism driven by a knob.
114. The block diagram of the transmitter is shown in Figure 21.
Each stage of the transmitter will be examined in turn.
Master oscillator
115. The master oscillator is an electron-coupled oscillator using the
valve 12ZI.1, (L-3). The basic circuit of the master oscillator is shown
in Figure 22.
116. The electron-coupled oscillator circuit makes it possible to
obtain a relatively high degree of stability in a valve oscillator. The
frequency of the generated osciallations is determined by the grid circuit
L11 - C35' This is a circuit of a high quality and of a high parameter
constancy. Coil L (like all the coils in the transmitter circuits) is
11
wound on a ceramic form, on which the individual windings have been made
by the silver spraying method).
IMPSECRET
/ 117, 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
50X1-HUM
117. Coil L11 b too-ether with the coupling capacitor 0
34 is placed
inside a screening cup, hermetically sealed against humidity. In order to
reduce the effect of the valve upon the circuit frequency, the circuit is
coupled with the grid by a small capacitance of C34 . 2 pF (wiring capaci?
tance). The semi?variable capacitor 032 serves for transmitter frequency
correction after a replacement of the master oscillator valve. The same
capacitor is also used for frequency correction after a replacement of the
frequency modulator valve.
118. In order to utilise the power of the high frequency oscillations,
to the anode of the valve is connected another resonant circuit: L6 ? C23 ?
024 located in a separate compartment of the frame. This circuit is
coupled with the grid circuit through the electron stream within the master
oscillator valve. The anode circuit is connected with the anode of the'
valve through two separating capacitors 022 and C25 and the anode voltage
is supplied through the choke L27. This is a typical circuit for a shunt
fed valve.
119. The cathode of the master osciallator is at a high frequency
potential in respect to the ground, and therefore the cathode as well as
the heater filament are de?coupled for the high frequencies with the aid
of the chokes L8, L, and L10. Capacitors 0281 C29, C30, and 031 are the
blocking capacitors. Resistor R18 gives automatic bias for the control
grid of the valve, developed as a voltage drop due to the grid current.
120. Resistors R15 and R16 reduce the anode and the screen grid
voltages respectively. The screen grid is grounded for the high frequency
currents through the capacitor 026.
121. Resistor R16 serves also for checking the master oscillator
valve operation. The voltage drop developed across this resistor by the
anode current, is apolied through the resistor R17 and the switch W-3 to the
terminals of the measuring instrument located on the front panel of the
transceiver unit,
WSECRT
50X1-HUM
/ Separator
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
29
50X1-HUM
122. The separator uses the valve 12ZIt (L-2)9 which is shunt fed
(Figure 23). This stage serves for the amplification of the high frequency
oscillations to the value required for the control of the power amplifier.
This stage also makes the oscillator circuit independent of the effects of
the changes in the load of the power amplifier, thus improving the generated
frequency stability.
The control grid bias of the valve L-2 is obtained
as a voltage drop across the resistor R14 due tc the grid currents.
123. The purpose of the other elements of this stage is identical
with similar elements in the master oscillator.
Power_analLier
124. The power amplifier (the output stage of the transmitter) uses
the valve 4?PIL (L-1),which is shunt fed (Figure 24). The anode circuit
of this amplifier L1 ? 03 is close coupled with the valve L-1. The semi?
variable capacitor 5rimm4,7 %le serves for the fine adjustment of the
circuit after a replacement of the power amplifier valve. Its shaft is
brought up through the front panel of the transceiver unit (Figure 17).
125. The anode circuit is permanently coupled with the aerial through
? an auto?transformer. The output power of the transmitter can be checked
with the aid of a crystal diode D-1, of type 10-2J-10, which is connected
to the input of the aerial cable through capacitor C1 . 1.5 pF. Current,
rectified by the crystal diode) flows through the resistor R1 and the switch
W-2 to the measuring instrument located on the front panel of the transceiver
unit. C2 is a blocking capacitor.
126. The control grid bias for the power amplifier valve is obtained
from two sources. From the voltage divider R8 ? 119, through the resistor
R and Choke L5' a permanent negative bias of about 8.5 V is applied to the
10
grid. This bias limits the anode current of the valve in absence of
?
Arit SECRET
/ excitation....
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
',SECRET
?
? 30 ?
50X1 -HUM
excitation. When the excitation voltage is applied to the control grid,
an automatic bias develops across the resistors Rio and R8 ' due to the grid
current. As a result, the combined control grid bias during the uperation
of the valve L-19 is about 19 V. The capacitors Cio and Cii are the
blocking capacitors.
127. To the suppressor grid of the power amplifier valve is applied a
small positive potential in respect of the cathode (about 9 V), through
the resistor R5. The suppressor grid is ground?,d for the high frequency
currents through the capacitor130
Frecuencv modulator
128. The frequency modulator uses the valve 12ZIL (L-4), connected as
a diode rs.i.97 (the suppressor and the screen grids are conner:ted to the
anode). The diagram of the frequency modulator is shown in Figure 25.
129. The anode current flows through the resistor RAE7? From this
resistor an automatic bias is applied to the control grid of the valve
(through the resistor R19L2Y and the choke L12 471). As a result, the
ij
control grid has a permanent negative bias of about 5 V in relation to the
cathode.
130.
Die to the negative potential of the grid, electrons emitted
from the cathode form around it an electron cloud /pace char
The
capacitance between this cloud and the cathode, together with the electrostatic
capacitance of the valve combine into a dynamic capacitance between the grid
and the cathode of the valve. The magnitude of this capacitance depends
upon the supply voltages of the valve.
131. When, in addition to the permanent negative voltage, a variable
voltage is applied to the grid of the valve from the modulation amplifier
through the capacitor 042 and the choke L12' then ? with the increase of the
grid negative potential, the electron cloud will approach the cathode and
the dynamic input capacity Cwd of the valve will be reduced (this capacitance
50X1 -HUN
is indicated....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1 -HUM
- ,
41)
bSECRET
?
?
- 31 -
is indicated on the diagram by a broken line). Conversely, when the nega-
tive potential of the grid is reduced, the electron cloud will approach the
grid, and the dynamic input capacity Cd of the valve will increase. The
w
control grld of the valve. is connected through the capacitor.036 to the grid
circuit L11 C35 which determines the oscillation frequency of the master
,
oscillator (1,3).
132. When the grid-cathode capacitance varies with the modulating
voltage, the combined capacitance of the master oscillator grid circuit also
varies accordingly. As a result, the frequency of the master oscillator
follows the variations of the modulating voltage or, in other words, the
master oscillator is frequency modulated.
"1.
133. Transmitter modulation is tested in the following ways from the
anode of the valve L-4 through the capacitor 048 and the resistor R33 the
variable modulating voltage is applied to two cuproxide rectifiers D-2 and D-3,
In series with the rectifiers, through the switch W-2, can be connected an?
indicating instrument, located on the front panel of the transceiver unit.
The depth of the master oscillator frequency modulation is determined by the
deflection of the instrument pointer.
134. The operation of the frequency modulator valve can be controlled
with the aid of ?the same instrument. In order to check the operation of
this valve, the instrument is connected to its anode through the resistor
R21 (at an appropriate position of the switch W-3), and it then measures the
voltage drop across the resistor R20 in the anode circuit of the valve.
The. modulation amplifier of the transmitter
135. The modulation amplifier of the transmitter consists of a two-
stage, wide-band (400 to 15000 kc/s), low frequency amplifier, which serves
for the amplification of the signals from the multiplexing unit to the
magnitude required for the proper operation of the transmitter frequency
modulator. Both stages are designed as resistance-capacitance amplifiers
using valves 12ZIE (Figure 26),connected as triodes. This amplifier is
11.11111FCRFT / characterised.,,,6
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
- 32 -
50X1 -HUM
characterised by very low non-linear distortions.
136. The overall non-linear distortion factor of the whole transmitter
does not exceed 1,5% at the modulating frequency of 6600 cis and a
frequency deviation up to 10 kc/s.
137. Grid bias for the modulation amplifier valves is obtained auto-
matically as the result of the voltage drop across the resistors in the
cathode circuit of each valve. Checking the operation of the amplifier
valves is done similarly as in the preceding transmitter stages.
138. At the input of the amDlifier there is a potentiometer for the
adjustment of the modulating voltage, and therefore for setting the required
value of the frequency deviation. The shaft of this potentiometer is
brought up through the front panel of the transceiver unit (vigure 17)0
The radio-rela receiver
139. The high frequency signals received by the aerial are applied to
the superheterodyne receiver with double frequency conversion, and with
an automatic frequency control circuit, (APCz). The block diagram of the
receiver is shown in Figure 27,
140. The receiver is mounted in two solid frames, one of which
411/ contains the H.F. stages, and the other the I.F. and L.F. stages (Figures
19 and 20).
141. The frame containing the high frequency stages of the receiver
is similar to the transmitter frame, and contains: high frequency amplifier -
1, mixer - 2, heterodyne oscillator - 3, automatic frequency control
circuit - 4, and the quartz calibrator - 5 (see Figure 27),
142. The intermediate and the low frequency stages are composed of:
first intermediate frequency amplifier - 6, frequency conversion circuit - 7,
second intermediate frequency amplifier - 8, amplitude limiter stage - 9
discriminator amplifier - 10, low frequency amplifier - 11, d.c. amplifier -
12,
41111111ECRET
/ 143.
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
411111rSECRET
50X1-HUM
143. The receiver, like the transmitter, is tuned with the aid of a
single knob.
-Ugh frecigIla_aglaLgla
144. The tuned high frequency amplifier is composed of two identical
stages (L-1, L-2), which are shunt fed and capacitively coupled.
145. The circuit diagram of the high frequency amplifier, including
the input circuit, is shown in Figure 28. The amplifier circuit coils
are made on ceramic forms, like the transmitter uircuit coils.
1111 146. The input circuit is coupled to the aerial through aa auto-
transformer.
147. The control grid bias of each valve is obtained as the automatic
grid bias due to the voltage drop across a bias resistor in the cathode
circuit.
148. The high frequency amplifier ensures sufficient amplification of
the signal applied to the mixer, and also attenuates the image-frequency
signal of-the first I.F.
?
kixer
149. The mixer (L-3) operates as a two grid frequency converter
(Figure 29). The signal voltage from the high frequency amplifier second
stage anode circuit is applied through the coupling capacitor C16 to the
control grid of the mixer valve 1,3. At the same time, the voltage from the
heterodyne ffocal7 oscillator (L-5) is applied to the suppressor grid of this
valve. In this case the suppressor grid of the mixer valve works as a
second control grid.
150. In the mixer there takes place the conversion of the high fre-
quency oscillations (66 to 70 Mc/s) of the received signal, into the first
intermediate frequency oscillations of 6.6 Mc/s.
11.0 SECRET
/ 151. 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
- 34 -
50X1 -HUM
151. A band-pass filter in the anode circuit of the mixer valve (L-3)
is composed of two circuits: L60251 and L7C27 coupled together through the
capacitor 026. Each circuit is separately screened. Screening shields
servo also for the air-tight sealing of the circuits. The anode circuit
coils have carbonyl powder cores. The first intermediate frequency voltage
is brought from the circuit L7C27 through a coaxial cable type R4-19 to the
control grid of the valve (L-7) of the first intermediate frequency amplifier.
152. The grid bias for the control and tho suppressor grids of the
mixer valve is obtained automatically as a result of the voltage drop across
the cathode resistors Rib and 1111.
119Iar_21m91122i7 oscillator
153. The heterodyne focag oscillator(I5) is designed and operates
in the same way as the master oscillator of the transmitter (Figure 22).
154. The suppressor grid voltage for the mixer valve (L-3) is taken
from the anode circuit of the heterodyne oscillator.
155. The heterodyne tlocai7 oscillator of the receiver operates in the
frequency range of 59,4 to 63.375 Mc/s.
First intermeelate fresnenci_p_m214:_ier
4110 156. The first intermediate frequency voltage from the anode circuit
of the mixer valve L-3 is applied through the separating capacitor 062 to
the control grid of the valve L-7 of the first intermediate frequency
amplifier (Figure 30). As a load in the anode circuit of the valve L-7
serves the band-pass filter composed of two sections: L20064, and L21066.
Circuits of this filter are built in the same way as the anode circuits
of the mixer. The control grid bias is obtained automatically as a result
of the voltage drop across the resistor Rin the cathode circuit of the
valve L-7.
/ Second fr.22122.p.21....
1111110 SECRET
50X1 -H UN/
50X1
nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
? 35
50X1 -HUM
Second_....112.212.1..9.1-miajl
57. The valve L-8 of the second frequency conversion circuit operates
simultaneously as a second mixer and as a second, quartz stabilised, hetero-
dyne 2r:focef oscillator. The cireuit diagram of the second frequency conver-
sion stage is shown in Figure 31. The quartz crystal unit is connected be-
tween the control grid and the screen grid which acts here as the heterodyne
oscillator anode. The quartzcrystal frequency is 7.060 Mc/s. As a result
of the action on the control grid of the valve L-8 of the first intermediate.
frequeAcy oscillations, and of the quartz crystal natural vibrations of a
frequency of 7.060 Mc/s, there appear in the valve anode difference frequency
oscillations of 460 kc/s, which is the second intermediate frequency. The
second intermediate frequency oscillations are selected and transmitted
through the anode circuit filter composed of ten sections, and tuned to the
frequency of 460 kc/s. The pass band and the necessary intervals between the
operating wavelengths of the receiver are basically determined by the reso-
nance curve 5haracteristi27: of this filter. The pass band of the receiver,
when the signal amplitude drops to half its value, is 48 kc/s, and when it
drops to 1/1000 of its value - 90 kc/s 5iif. The ten section filter is
built as a single, small, hermetically sealed box.
158. The control grid bias for the valve L-8 of the second conversion
circuit is automatically obtained as a result of the voltage drop of the grid
current across tho resistor R42.
Second intermediate freouenc amplifier
159. In the three stage second intermediate frequency amplifier the
first and the third stages (L-9, L-11) are identical. The load of each stage
consists of a single resonant circuit. The circuit diagram of the WPCz-2
(second intermediate frequency amplifier) is shown in Figure 32. The second
stage of the amplifier L-10 is loaded with two screened circuits coupled by
?
the capacitor 098. The circuit of this stage is similar to the circuit of
the first intermediate, frequency amplifier (Figure 30). In order to extend
the pass band frequency range, all the circuits of the second intermediate
/ frequency...
orrogne"r
50X'
50X1 -HUN
nRcliassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
? 36 ?
a
frequency amplifier are shunted With additional resistances.
AEplitude limiter
160. The amplitude limiter stage circuit operates with grid detection
and at reduced anode and screen voltages of the valve L-12 (about 50 V).
The circuit diagram is shown in Figure 33. In proportion to the increase
of the intermediate frequency voltage applied to the control grid of the
-limiter valve through the capacitor C103, the negative grid bias increases.
This bias develops across the resistor R62 due to the grid current.. As the
anode and the screen grid voltages are relatively low, the valve anode current
soon attains it saturation value, reducing therefore the average value of
the slope of the anode current characteristic of the valve, hence also
reducing the amplification of the stage.
161. . At a higher intermediate frequency voltage, the Legative bias of
the control grid increases, and the limiter begins to operate near the cut-
off value of the anode current. The d.c. component of the anode current
is then reduced, and therefore the anode and the. screen grid voltages rise.
As a result, the average valUe of the slope of the anode current character-
istic, and the valve saturation current remain constant at all the inter-
mediate frequency voltage values above the so called limiting threshold
(Figure 34)4
Beyond the limiting threshold therefore, oven a considerable
rise in the intermediate frequency voltage (the received signal voltage) does
not increase the voltage in the anode circuit of the limiter.
162. Similar to the above amplitude limiter is the operation of the
second 5.ntermediate frequency amplifier valves L-11, L-10 and L-9 (at a high
signal level at the receiver input), and also of the first intermediate
frequency amplifier valve L-7, resulting in a constant signal value at the
input of the frequency detector.
ETL9.112..may detector feriscriminator7
163. The discriminator (L-.13 and L-14) converts the frequency modu-
lated second intermediate frequency oscillations into low frequency
IIMP SECRET
50X1 -HUM
oscillations. ....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
11111 SECRET
- 37 -
50*1-HUM
oscillations. The circuit diagram of the discriminator is shown in
Figure 33. The discriminator circuit uses two valves type 12ZIt connected
as diodes (all the grids are short-circuited with the anode).
164. In the anode circuit of the amplitude limiter valve L-12 there is
a resonant circuit composed of two coils L36 and L38 connected in series, and
of the capacitors Clio and 0108. This circuit is tuned to the second
intermediate frequency of 460 kc/s. The resistor R67 serves for widening
the pass band of this circuit. With this circuit are inductively coupled
two more circuitsg the circuit L37C112 tuned to the frequency of 490 kc/s,
and the circuit L391 C.14 tuned to the frequency of 430 kc/s. When an un-
modulated signal is applied to the discriminator, then the voltages of the
second intermediate frequency developed across the circuits L C , and
37 112 .
across the circuit L39 and C14 are equal. These voltages are applied to
the diodes L-13 and L-14. Currents rectified by the diodes will develop
but of opposite
the earth in
across the resistors R68 and R69 d.c. voltages of equal value
sign. The resultant voltage in the load between point A and
this case will be zero.
165. If, on the other hand, the second intermediate frequency oscilla-
tions are frequency modulated then with the change of frequency in any
direction, voltages across L370/12 and acrossL39 and C114 will not be equal.
In the case of a frequency increase (460 +
ft)1 voltage across the upper
circuit L37C112 will be higher than the voltage across the lower circuit.
As a result, current rectified by the upper diode L-139 and consequently the
voltage across the resistor R68 will be higher than the current rectified by
the lower diode and the voltage across the resistor R69. In this manner,
with an increase of frequency, point A will acquire a negative potential in
relation to earth. In the case of a frequency decrease (460 - ft)
voltage rectified by the lower diode L-14 will predominate, and as a result
50X1-HUN
/ point A ....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
point A will acquire a positive potential in relation to earth. The
magnitude of the potential difference between point A and the earth varies
in proportion to the magnitude of frequency deviation ft.
166. The discriminator characteristic shown in Figure 35 shows the
dependence of the resultant voltage values between the point A and the earth
on the frequency deviations on both sides of the average frequency.
167. From the output of the discriminator (from point A), the low
frequency voltage is applied to the low frequency amplifier through the
capacitor C117. From the same point, voltage is applied to the receiver
automatic frequency control circuit.
IMLIP29.121122Y amplifier
168. The low frequency amplifier utilises valve L-15 (Figure 36) with
transformer output. The low frequency voltage is applied from the dis-
criminator load (point A, Figure 33) through the capacitor C117 to the
voltage divider R72 - R73 and from the resistor R, of this divider to the
i3
control grid of the valve L-15. From the secondary winding of the step-down
transformer Tr1 (721) in the anode circuit of the valve, the low frequency
signals are applied to the input of the multiplexing unit (Block 2).
169. The control grid bias for the valve L-15 is obtained automatically
from the voltage drop across the resistor R75 in the cathode circuit. The
'valve L-15 operates as a triode (the screen and the suppressor grids being
short-circuited to the anode), in order to reduce the non-linear distortiens.
Automatic fre uenc, control circuit
of the receiver
170. The automatic frequency control circuit (APCz) is used for the
purpose of reducing the do-tuning of the receiver frequency in relation to
the transmitter frequency. It also eliminates the need for manual fine
tuning corrections. The voltage across the discriminator load R68 - R69
(Figure 339 point A), is applied to the control grid of the d.c. ampli-
fier valve L-16 through a filter composed of the
resistor R70 and the
50X1-H UN
/ capacitor 0118...
nt?ict
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1 -HUM
capacitor CI18 (Figure 37). The time constant of this filter is so chosen
that the AFC circuit does not respond to brief de-tunings due to the
carrier frequency modulation. The AFC circuit can, therefore, operate during
reception of frequency modulated signals.
171. The magnitude and the sign of the controlling voltage depends
upon the magnitude and direction of the intermediate frequency de-tuning in
relation to the average resonant frequency of the discriminator circuits
(mid-frequency of the receiver pass band).
4111 172. The d.c, amplifier uses the valve L-16. This amplifier serves
?
for the increase of the AFC circuit regulation factor. The valve of the
d.c. amplifier is connected as a triode. In order to prevent the AFC
circuit reacting to the low frequency signals, in addition tc the large time
constant filter R70 - 0118, connected to the amplifier input, the anode of
the valve L-16 is shunted with the large capacity of C104. From the anode
of the valve L-16 the amplified d.c. voltage is applied to the control grid
of the frequency control valve L-6 through the potentiometer R571 the switch
W-7, and the resistor R27 (Figure 38). In order to compensate the positive
voltage applied to the control grid of the valve L-6 from the anode of the
valve L-162 a compensating voltage of 45 V is applied to the potentiometer
R57 from a special supply source. The accurate compensation of the positive
voltage is carried out with the aid of the potentiometer R57 located on the
left-hand side wall of the WPCz (I.F. amplifier) of the receiver (Figure 20).
173. The automatic frequency control stage is connected to the grid
circuit of the heterodyne oscillator through the separating capacitor 049
(Figure 38). The principle of operation of this stage is the same as that
of the transmitter frequency modulator, which was described above. The
voltage applied from the discriminator to the grid of the frequency control
stage varies the frequency of the first heterodyne oscillator in such a way
that the initial de-tuning between the receiver and the transmitter is redImpa_
50X1-HU
/ 174.
50X
I npriaccified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
ECRET
? 40 ?
50X1-HUM
174. The automatic frequency control circuit of the R-401 station
operates during de-tuning in the range of ? 25 kc/s. The final de-tuning
when this circuit is operating does not exceed 3.5 kc/s.
gl-121Iq_9_ALIIPator
175. The quartz calibrator is used for the correction of the trans-
mitter and the receiver frequencies after replacing the master oscillator
and the modulator valves in the transmitter, after replacing the heterodyne
oscillator and the frequency control stage valves in the receiver, and also
during periodical testing of the frequency calibration and accuracy of
setting of the transmitter and the receiver. A quartz calibrator is
an integral element of any transmitting and receiving equipment. The valve
(L-4) used in the circuit is of type 12= connected as trio(te (Figure 39).
The quartz crystal is connected between the anode and the control grid of the
valve. The natural frequency of the quartz crystal equals half the first
intermediate frequency of the receiver fkw . 3.3 Mc/s. The anode circuit
load consists of the resistor R19. The switching on and off of the vartz
calibrator is done with the switch W-5 located on the front panel of the
transceiver unit. When the quartz generator starts oscillating, across
the resistor R19 there appears a voltage of the natural frequency of the
quartz crystal fkw, and its harmonics nfkw 9 where n is the order of harmonic,
an integer. This voltage from the resistor R19 is applied to the grid cir-
cuit of the valve L-7 of the first interLiediate frequency amplifier, and also
to the receiver input. After amplification in the high frequency amplifier
and conversion in the mixer (L-3), the 20th harmonic of the quartz crystal
(for the first operating frequency), or the 21st harmonic of the quartz
crystal (for the 05th operating frequency) is combined with the receiver
heterodyne oscillator fh, and produces the first intermediate frequency
f, = nf giving a voltage across the anode load of the mixer (L-3).
1-posr. kw
SECRET
/ 176. 50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
NIVSECRET
- 41 -
50X1-HUM
176. The first intermediate frequency (f1-posr) and the second
harmOnic of the quartz frequency (2 fkw) coming from the intermediate
frequency amplifier, are combined after detection and produce a beat fre-
quency at the output of the telephone channel. From the tone of the beats
it is possible to estimate the degree of de-tuning of the first heterodyne
oscillator of the receiver. When the receiver heterodyne oscillator is
tuned accurately, a zero beat is obtained in the first telephone channel,
The beats, the frequency of which does not exceed 500 c/s, are audible in
the first telethons channel. If the beat frequency exceeds 4.5 kc/s, than
it is audible in the second telephone channel. It is necessary to bear in
mind that in this case, as the heterodyne oscillator de-tuning is being
reduced, so the beat tone frequency in the second telephone channel will
increase, because in this channel use is made of the lower side band fre-
quency of the modulated carrier spectrum (see Chapter I).
4oMultiplexgjnit
177. In the multiplexing unit (Block 2) are assembled the telephone
and the telegraph channel circuits. In addition, in this unit are located:
41) the "talk-call" device, (URW); the audio calling signal generator (GM);
the calling signal converter (ZZ); and the d.c. vibrator converter of the
line circuits. The voltages and currents in the various circuits, and the
operating data for the multiplexing unit valves are given in Appendices'
4 and 5.
Construction of Block 2
178. As a constructional base of the multiplexing unit use is made of an
aluminum casting (chassis), to which the front panel is attached with bolts.
In order to facilitate repairs, the front panel can be unscrewe 50X1-HUM
removed from the chassis. For this purpose, the connections between the
elements located on the chassis and the elements located on the front panel
50X1
/ are made...
lib SECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
7 42 ?
50X1 -HUM
are made of flexible and specially lengthened wiring. The elements of the
telephone channels are located on the left hand side, and the elements
of the telegraph channels on the right hand side of the chassis and of the
front panel of the unit. The external view of the unit is shown in the
Figures 40, 41, 42, 43, The most important elements of the multiplexing
unit (filters, oscillator and discriminator circuits, transformers, etc.)
are hermetically sealed.
179. The housing of the unit is made of dr,raluminium sheet. On the
? rear wall there are holes for the half-connectors of the connecting cellos.
180. The dimensions of the multiplexing unit including the housing
are: 370 x 285 x 415 mm. Weight of the units 38 kg.
,The first tele hone channel
1.81. The first telephone channel is the natural speech frequency
channel and occupies the frequency band of 400 to 2500 cis.
182. The block diagram of the first telephone channel is shown in
Figure 44. The connections shown in this diagram represent operation as a
terminal station, with a two-who input. The two-wire line coming from
the telephone exchange is connec:ted through the line panel (not shown in
Figure 44), through the mode of operation switch W-1, the talking key K-1,
the transit attenuator T1 (0.5 N), to the hybrid junction unit (UR). The
signal from the exchange, after passing through the hybrid Junction unit,
through the amplitude limiter, through the attenuator (1.8 N), through the
switch W-3, through the low frequency ?filter F-I with a band-pass up to
2500 c/s, is applied at the level of - 4.2 N to the input of the modulation
amplifier of the transmitter.
183. From the output of the radio-relay receiver, the signal of the
level of + 0.7 1\T after passing through the attenuator 0.5 N, the low frequency
410 filter F=I1 with a band-pass up to 2500 cis, and the attenuator T (1.8 N),
41IIP SECRET
/ is applied....
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
rirSECDFT
? 43 ?
50X1 -HUM
is applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier. Into the anode
circuit of the valve L-1 of this amplifier is inserted the level indicator
WP, for checking of the channel output level. From the output of the
amplifier, the signal, after passing through the mode of operation switch
W-1, the attenuator T5 (1.3 N), the hybrid junction unit UR, the
attenuator Tl' the talking key K-19 and the mode of operation switCh W-19
enters at the level of - 2 N into the two-wire line.
184. Let us consider now the path of the calling signal with a two-
wire channel inout. The magneto calling signal sent by the telephone
exchange through the two-wire line, arrives through the switch W-1 to the
receiver of the magneto calling signal OZI9 and activates the relays
P1 and P2 (see Figure 49)0 This connects the audio calling signal gene-
rator GZA to the transmitting part of the channel, and the audio calling
signal of 800 c/s is applied to the input of the transmitter modulation
amplifier.
185. From the output of the radio-relay receiver, the calling signal of
800 c/s is applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier, just as in
the case of the telephone speech signal. In the anode circuit of the valve
is the audio calling signal receiver OZA, which activates the relays P3 and
P4 when the alternating voltage of 800 cis is applied to it
As a result, the voltage of 4, 12 V is applied
to the relay P3, which
activates the calling signal converter ZZ and connects it to the two-wire
line leading to the exchange.
186. With a four-wire channel input with re-transmission of the magneto
calling signal, the channel mode of operation switch W-1 should be set in
position 3. In this case, the two-wire input terminals serve for reception
only, and an additional pair of terminals is used for transmission.
1100?SECRET.
/ 187.
50X1
50X1 -HUI\
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
- 44 -
50X1 -HUM
187. Let us consider in turn the speech and the calling signal path with
a four-wire telephone channel input. In this case the subscriber's
calling signal arrives at the terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw."274-wire trans-
missionf, and from there, through the switch W-1 (contact 3) and the
talking key K-1, is applied to the hybrid junction unit UR, and then to
the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier, as in the case of the
two-wire channel input. The signal arriving from a distant operator is
applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier from the receiver output,
similarly as in the case described above. From the amplifier output,
this signal, through the switch W-1 (contact 3), and the attenuators T3' T4
arrives at the terminals "4-re przew.odb." 274-wire receptiotlf, and from
there, through the two-wire line is brought up to the subscriber,
188. The magneto calling signal arriving from the subscriber to the
terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw." 274-wire transmissions is applied through the
switch W-1 to the magneto calling signal receiver OZI. This will activate
the relays P1 and P2, and the audio calling signal generator GM will be
connected to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier, as described
above.
189. The 300 c/s calling signal from the subscriber, after passing the
receiving part of the channel, is brought to the audio calling signal
receiver OZA, activates the relays F4 and P5, and as a result, the calling
signal is sent into the line from the calling signal conVerter through the
termineAs "4-re przew.odb." 274-wire receptionS.
190. In the case of the 4-wire channel input without re-transmission of
the magneto calling signal, the channel mode of operation switch W-1 is set
in position 2. This kind of operation is intended for the case of secondary
multiplexing of the telephone channel by the telegraph channels with the aid
of type P-313 equipment. In this case, in the transmitting part of the
50X1-HUM
/ channel,
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
17111 SECRET
? 45 ?
50X1 ?HUM
channel, the amplitude limiter stage is switched off Lalsconnectedf and
in the receiving part of the channel, the audio calling signal receiver OZA
is so switched off ffisconnectedg. On the transmitting side, the signal
follows the following paths from the terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw.." 25-wire
trammissiollf, through the switch W-1 (contact 2), the attenuators Tl and
T2' to the hybrid junction unit UR, from its output, through the contact
2 of the switch W-1, through the attenuator 1.8 N, the switch W-3 and the low
frequency filter F-I, to the transmitter input.
191. Froa the receiver output the signal is brought up to the low
frequency amplifier, and from there, through the
attenuator T3' and switch W-1 (contact 2), it is
"4-ro przew.odb." 273-wire receptionf,
192. With a two-wire telephone channel connection of the R-401 station
switch W-1 (contact 2), the
applied to the terminals
to the telephone channel of the type P-310 equipment, or to the R-400, the
switch W-2 should be set in position "Tranz.", which disconnects the
attenuator T1. In this case the speech and the calling signal pass in both
directions in the same way as during the operation of the channel with a
two-wire input.
193. The audio calling signal generator Ga, the calling signal
converter ZZ, and the "talk-call" circuit URW, are common to both telephone
channels,
194. The "talk-call" circuit makes possible the monitoring of the
telephone channel communication, as well as the making of service calls
between the radio-relay stations, and also between the stations and the
telephone exchanges.
195. In order to provide the required stability of channel operation
the re-transmission at the intermediate station is carried out by means of
the 4-wire circuit. In this case the switch W-3 is set to the position
ttrietr. Is 50X1 ?HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 _
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
11111r SECRET
C.6 -
50X1-HUM
"Retr.", and the switch W-1 to the position 1 ("2 przew.TF"). At such a
position of the switches, the signal from the output of the filter F-II
in the receiving part of the channel is brought to the second half-set.
During re-transmission, the signal arriving from the receiver of the second
half-set is fed into the attenuator 4 N9 and then, after passing the low
frequency filter F-IL is applied to the input of the first half-set trans-
mitter modulation amplifier. In the receiving part of the channel, the
low frequency amplifier is connected through the attenuator 1.8 N to the
audio calling s:gnal receiver. In this way provision is made for the
reception of the calling signal at the intermediate station.
196. If it is necessary to answer when the intermediate station
receives a calling signal, then the switch W-3 should be set to the position
of operation of the particular channel as a terminal station. With the aid
of the "talking" key K-1, the "talk-call" circuit is connected towards the
subscriber radio-relay station, and the conversation can be carried out.
In order to send a calling signal from an intermediate station, the switch
W-3 should also be set to the position of operation as a terminal station.
Thrd junction unit
197. The hybrid junction unit serves for transition from a four-wire
circuit into a two-wire line connecting the station with a telephone exchange.
It enables the passage of the voice currents from the telephone exchange
to the transmitter modulation amplifier only, and also the voice currents
from the receiver - towards the telephone exchange only (Figure 45).
198. The hybrid junction unit is composed of a differential transformer
Tr1(10)*, of a balancing network R10(52) 02(51)9 of the attenuator T1(6) in
/ the two,...
* The figures in brackets indicate the numbering of the appropriate
elements of the second telegraph channel.
SECRET
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
77411
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
? 47 ?
50X1 -HUM
the two-wire side, of the transfer attenuator T2(7)9 and of the receiving
side attenuator T5(10). In order to simplify the diagram, Figure 45 does
not show the details of the connections between the attenuators T1(6) and
92(7) as this has already been described during the examination of the first
telephone channel block diagram (Figure 44).
25.vo pages of original and Figures
46, 47, 48 misoinil
199. By means of the potentiometer R20(61), the shaft of which is
brought up through the front panel, the output level of the telephone
channel can be adjusted. The calling signal voltage is applied to the
control grid of the valve L-1(2) from the potentiometer R20(61) through
the transformer Tr5(14). In the amplifier is applied a negative feedback
due to .the fact that the cathode resistors R16(58) and R15(57) are not
shunted by the capacitors. The resistor R15(57) serves for checking
5ontrolligg7 the operation of the valve L-1(2).
200. In the anode circuit of the valve there are two transformers
connected in series. Transformer Tr4(13) is the audio calling signal
receiver input transformer, and the transformer Tr3( 12) is the amplifier
output transformer. When the channel is operating in a two-wire system
the winding 3 ? 4 of this transformer is connected to the hybrid junction
unit; during operation in a four-wire system the windings 3 ?4 and 5 ? 6,
connected in series, form the channel output. Winding 7 ? 8 serves for the
connection to the "talk-call" circuit URW, which operates in a four-wire
circuit.
.110 SECRET
201. 50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
? SECRET
? 48 ?
50X1-HUM
201. Part of the alternating voltage from the windings 3 ? 4 and
5 ? 6 is applied through the resistor R11(53) to the cuproxide rectifier
D-4(10), which can be connected to the measuring instrument for the
adjustment of the telephone channel output level.
The audio callin signal receiver
202. In parallel with the transformer Tr4(13) are two resonant
circuits connected in seriesg one is a series resonant circuit L2(19)'
C6(55), the other is a parallel resonant circuit L1(18), C5(54). They
are both tuned to the frequency of 800 c/s These circuits
50X1
are connected to the cuproxide rectifiers D-5(11) and D-6(12), the load
of which consists of the polarized relay winding P5(12). The above
-
circuit operates in the following way on the arrival of the 800 c/s calling
signal, the current in the relay winding connected to the parallel
resonant circuit is at its maximum, and the current in the relay winding
connected to the series resonant circuit is at its minimum. As a result,
the arm of the relay P5(12) moves towards the contact I) and shunts the relay
P4(11). P4(11)
The arm of the relay is released and closes the 12 V circuit
comprising the pilot (signal) lamp IN2(4), and the additional relay P
-3(10)e
203. The relay P3(10) disconnects the hybrid junction unit from the
two-wire output, and connects it to the 600 ohms resistance. It also
activates the calling signal converl-,er, and connects it to the line connect-
ing the station with the telephone exchange. In this way, on the reception
of the calling signal from the radio-relay station, the red pilot
ffndicatos7 lamp LIT2(4) lights up, and a 20 to 30 c/s alternating current
calling signal ic sent into the line.
204. For all the frequencies different from 800 cis, the current in
the relay P5(12) 'winding connected to the series resonant circuit will be
higher than at 800 c/s, and as a result the relay arm will be either at the
.111110 SECRET
idle contact..,
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
SECRET
- 49 -
idle contact or in a neutral position. To prevent the possibility of
sending a calling signal by the voice frequency currents, the calling
signal receiver acts with a delay. This is obtained by the means of the
delayed release of the relays P4(11) and P5(12)au (which have short-
circuited windings).
2t2_Tagneto calling sivnal receiver
205. The output of the magneto calling signal receiver is connected
in parallel to the two-wire channel input terminals, or to the transmitter
terminals with Cour-wire system operation (Figure 49). The magneto
calling signal coming from the line, is applied through the choke D11(4) to
the selenium rectifier bridge circuit D-1(7). The choke D11(4) presents
a high impedance to the voice frequency currents, and so preirents the
shunting of the speech circuit. For the 20 to 30 c/s frequency calling
signal currents, this choke does not present practically any impedance.
On reception of the magneto calling signal, the clArrent rectified by the
rectifier circuit D-1(7) flows through the winding of the relay P1(8).
This relay closes the contacts which supply the voltage of + 12 V to the
pilot rindicatoil lamp liff1(3 ) and to the winding of the relay P2(9). As
a result of the closing of appropriate contacts in the relay P2(9), the
voltage + 12 V is applied to the windings of the bell Dzi. At the same
time the audio calling signal generutor is connected to the transmitting
part of the channel.
206. In this manner, when the magneto calling signal arrives from the
exchange, the green pilot ffndicato2 lamp LN1(3) lights up, the bell Dz
rings, and a calling signal is sent by the radio-relay station. The
frequency of this calling signal is 800 c/s, as the radio-relay does not
transmit the 20 to 30 c/s frequency signals.
SECRET
The audio frealrEac 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03106001000V-R54
?
?
SECRET
50
frequency llin
207. The audio frequency calling signal generator GP, which serves
also for measurement purposes, is common to both telephone channels. This
generator operates continuously; and is connected to the bransmitting part
of the telephone channel (Figure 49) when the calling signal is to be sent
through this channel from the telephone exchange, and also when the calling
signal or a measuring signal is sent from the radio-relay station.
208. The audio frequency calling signal generator (Figure 50) has a
resonance circuit L23C68 between the control grid and the cathode of the
valve L-3, and generates 800 c/s frequency oscillations. When a calling
signal is sent, or during measurements in the first telephone channel, the
voltage with f = 800 cis is taken from the winding 5 - 6, and in the second
telephone channel - from the winding 7 - 8 of the transformer Tr15. The
generator output level can be adjusted with the potentiomei;er R62 in the
anode-screen circuit of the valve L-3.
209. The instrument indicating the measurement signal level in the
first telephone channel is connected to the terminals DE, and in the second
telephone channel - to the terminals ZZ.
The calling_Ekpal converter
210. The calling signal converter is common to both telephone
channels. When the calling signal is being transmitted, or the magneto
calling signal is being re-translated, the calling signal converter is,
switched with the aid of the relayP3(10 )fflinto the line of the particular
channel. The converter consists of two relays, of the transformer Tr8, and
of the filter and spark-quenching circuits. The calling signal converter
is supplied with a d.c. voltage of 12 V. The 20 to 30 c/s alternating
current is obtained from they secondary winding of the transformer Tr8.
The converter gives a voltage of 70 V across a resistance of 2000 ohms.
41110PSECRET
1--'22-1:1LP-qaq-n-Ce-OX1- HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013%08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031006010004:5-
?
?
MI SECRET
? 51 ?
IOLLE22221292-filters
211. The circuit diagrams and the characteristics of the low
frequency filters F-I and F-II of the first telephone channel are identical.
Induction coils of these filters are wound on alsifer rings of type
TC1C-53 Li indistincf, The filters have mica capacitors, and are
hermetically sealed. The wave impedance of the filters is 600 ohms. As
the first telephone channel occupies the frequency band from 400 to 2500
c/s, the low frequency filters for this channel are designed for the pass
band up to 2500 c/s.
212. The filter attenuation for the frequencies of other channels of
the station is not less than 6.8 N. The attenuation characteristic of the
filter is shown in Figure 51 (curve 1).
The second tele hone channel
213. The second telephone channel is an ultrasonic, or carrier,
channel, The speech frequency band (400 to 2500 c/s) transmitted through
this channel is first converted into an appropriate higher frequency band
(4900 to 7000 c/s), which is then transmitted by the radio-relay channel.
214. The arrangement of the input circuits and connections of the
second telephone channel, from the two-wire and the four-wire hybrid junction
unit, is the same as in the first telephone channel (Figure 44). As far
as the circuit diagram is concerned, the second telephone channel differs
from the first channel only by the design of the transmitting and the
receivjng portion, The block diagram of the second telephone channel from
the input of the hybrid junction unit, is shown in Figure 52.
215. The telephone speech signals, which occupy the frequency band
from 400 to 2500 c/s, from the output of the hybrid junction unit, and after
passing through the amplitude limiter stage and the attenuator Tivf7 are
applied to the ring,--type modulator, to which are also applied 7.4 kc/s
eliSECRET
/ oscillations...,
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
IN. SECRET
50X1-HUM
52
oscillations from the local oscillator G. In the ring-type modulator,
the amplitude of the oscillations of the generator G is modulated by the
telephone speech signal. The lower side-band of the amplitude modulated
oscillations 4.9 to 7 kc/s (see Figure 2) is separated with the aid of the
band-pass filter F-III. The loWer side-band frequency oscillations
separated by the band-pass filter are applied to the input of the modulation
amplifier of the transmitter.
216. During reception, the oscillations of the 4.9 to 7 kc/s fre-
quency band of the second telephone channel are brought up from the receiver
output through the band-pass filter F-IV and the attenuator T14 to the
ring-type demodulator "Dem". At the same time, to the demodulator are
applied the 7.4 kc/s oscillations from the local generator G, In the
demodulator "Dem" the 4.9 to 7 kc/s frequency band oscillations are converted
into the 400 to 2500 c/s frequency band oscillations (corresponding to the
transmitted telephone speech) which, after being separated with the aid
of the filter F-V, are applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier.
From the amplifier, the amplified signals are sent to the ,subscriber, like
the signals in the first telephone channel.
217. For the calling signal transmission through the second telephone
channel use is also made of the 800 c/s frequency signal which, however, is
converted in the modulator into a signal of 6600 c/s. In the receiving
side, the 6600 c/s frequency signal is re-converted back to the 800 c/s
frequency signal, which then activates the audio frequency calling signal
receiver, as in the first telephone channel.
218. The re-transmission of the second telephone channel/at the
intermediate station is carried out without the re-conversion of the signal
frequency band (without demodulation), i.e., at the frequency band of
4.9 to 7 kc/s.
41110SECRET
/ 219.
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
? 53 ?
219. The circuit diagram, the principle of operation, and the elec-
trical parameters of the magneto calling signal receiver (Figure 49), of
of the attenuators in the input
the amplitude limiter stage
circuits, of the hybrid junction unit (Figure 45), of the low frequency
amplifier with the level indicator IP and the audio frequency
receiver Oa
50X1
calling signal
in the second telephone channel, are the same as 50X1
for the respective units and circuits in the first telephone channel.
The modulator
220. For the conversion of the speech frequency band in he second
telephone channel, a ring,-type modulator is used, composed of the trans-
formers Tr16 and Tr179 and of the cuproxide rectifiers D-15 (Figure 53),
The cuproxide rectifiers D-15 are connected ffyi series to form a ring, hence
the name. Let us examine the principle of speech frequency band conversion
in a ring-type modulator,
221. An audio frequency voltage is applied to the winding 1-2 of the
input transformer TrI6 (Figure 55a), and a 7.4 kc/s frequency voltage from
the generator G is applied to the central points of the windings 5 ? 6 of
the transformers Tr16 and Tr17 (Figure 55b).
222. The resistance of the cuproxide rectifiers in one direction is
very low, and in the opposite direction is very high, The 7.4 kc/s
frequency voltage from the generator periodically alters the resistance of the
modulator rectifiers in such a way that at the positive half-cycle of the
voltage the current passes through the rectifiers in the longitudinal
branches (Figure 54a), and at the negative half-cycle - the current passes
through the rectifiers in the diagonal branches (bee Figure 54b). As a
result, the audio frequency current flows through the primary winding of the
transformer Tr17, and also through its secondary winding and the load
resistor R
obc. in one direction at the position half-cycle of the voltage of
50X1 -HUN
/ the generator....
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
III SECRET
?
?
? 54 ?
50X1 -HUM
the generator G, and in the opposite direction at the negative half-cycle
of this voltage. In this respect, the operation of the ring-type modulator
can be compared to the operation of a current reversing switch, the rate of
reversal of which equals 7.4 kc/s.
223. 2:16 lines missing at the modulator output alternates
with a frequency of 7.4 kc/s, and its amplitude varies according to the
audio frequency voltage which is applied to the modulator input, This
means that amplitude modulated oscillations are obtained at the output of
the ring-type modulator. The lower side-band frequency signal (4.9 to
7 kc/s) is separated with the aid of the band-pass filter and is
then applied to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier (Figure 52).
224. ffirst line illegible, but perhaps as follows: "To ensure the
symmetry of the modulator circuit, thus eliminating the undesired 7.4 kc/s
voltage, a balancing variable resistor R7017 has been employed at its
output in the circuit.
225. The attenuation introduced by the modulator at the conversion
of the speech frequency band is about 0,8 N.
The demodulator
226, The demodulator D-16 serves for the conversion of the 4.9 to
7 ko/s frequency band oscillations arriving from the receiver output, into
the audio frequency band of 400 to 2500 c/s. The frequency conversion
process which takes place in the demodulator is the reverse of the process
taking place in the modulator. For this reason, the demodulator circuit
diagram and the principle of operation do not differ from the circuit
diagram and the principle of operation of the modulator (Figures 53, 54, 55).
The only difference is that the demodulator does not require the balancing
potentiometer. The 7.4 kc/s voltage is applied .... 251iim and a half lines
missing introduced by the demodulator during the frequency conversion of
the received signals is about 0.5 N.
SECRET
/ The generator 50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
SECRET
? 55 ?
50X1-HUM
Thp_mperator
227. The 7.4 kc/s frequency generator operates as an electron
coupled oscillator (Figure 56). Such a circuit gives high frequency
stability, and also ensures that the load impedance does not greatly affect
the frequency of the generated oscillations. The frequency of the generator
oscillations depends on the parameters of the grid circuit L24.064. The
resistor R76 serves for checking the operation of the valve L-4. In the
valve anode circuit there is a resonant circuit Leo, which is inductively
coupled with the modulator (winding 3 ? 5), and with the demodulator
(winding 4 ? 7). The generator resonant circuits are hermetically sealed.
The filters
228. The circuit diagrams and the characteristics of +he band-pass
filters F-III and F-IV of the second telephone channel are identical.
These filters are designed for passing the frequency band. within the limits
of 4700 and 7000 c/s. For the frequencies of other channels they introduce
an attenuation of not less than 5.8 N.
229. The characteristic of the second telephone channel band-pass
filter is shown in Figure 51 (curve 2).
230. The second telephone channel low frequency filter F-V passes
frequencies up to 2500 c/s.
231. ffine or two words obliterated - The filtersf are wound on
alsifer rings TCzK-55 51, 53.7. The filters use mica capacitors. Filters
of the second channel are hermetically sealed. The rated characteristic
impedance value of the filters is 600 ohms.
The "talk-call" unit
232. The "talk-call" unit (URW) serves for carrying out the service
calls 5onversation.i7 through any telephone channel between the radio-relay
stations, or between a radio-relay station and a telephone exchange station,
UP SECRET
and also....
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
III SECRET
- 56 -
50X1 -HUM
and also permits the checking of the quality of communication in both
telephone channels.
233. The "talk-call" unit is composed of the following elements:
the "talking" keys Kl and 1(4 (one in each channel), the checking key K2,
the calling signal K3, the bell Dm1, the telephone hand-set MKT, and the
auto-transformer Tr
9E/
234. During operation as a terminal station with two-wire channel
input, the "talk-call" unit is connected into the channels also as a two-
wire unit.
Thi "talk-call" unit URW operates as follows: when the key Ki
(or 1(4 in the second telephone channel) is set to the position "Centrala"
fExchange f or "Kan.rad." fRadio channelf, the two-wire circuit between
the input of the particular channel and the hybrid junction unit is dis-
connected (Figure 44)9 and at the same time the telephone hand-set of the
URW is connected towards the telephone exchange or towards the radio-relay
through the auto-transformer Tr9.arr. The microphone is energised through
the contacts of the "talkinekey. In this case, when the calling signal
arrives from the disconnected direction, the appropriate pilot ffndicatoi7
? lamp lights up, and the bell rings. The calling signal does not pass
any further.
235. In order to send the calling signal from the URW, the calling
signal key 1(3 should be set in position 'Tow" fcalling signalf. Key Kl
(or 1(4) in this case should be in a position corresponding to the direction
where the calling signal is to be sent ("Centrala" or "Kanorad.").
236. With the aid of the checking key K2 the earphone of the telephone
of the hand-set of the URW can be connected in parallel to either telephone
channel, and thus to check the transmission of the telephone conversation
without interfering with the communication in the other channel.
/ 237 ?
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
? 57 ?
50X1 -HUM
237. When the station operates as intermediate, in order to carry on
a service conversation between the stations, the particular channel should
be switched on to terminal operation with the aid of the switch W3(7), and
the URW should be connected to this channel with the aid of the key 1(1(4).
The mode of operation switch of the particular channel should be in the
position "2 TF".
238, fome words obliterated7 checking key K2.
239. The "talk-call" unit enables one to maintain service communi-
111 cation with the telephone exchange when the station transmitter and receiver
are disconnected.
1:122-.1222f201-2.12annels
240. The telegraph channels are ultrasonic. Their oreration is based
upon the principle of telegraph pulse transmission with the aid of frequency
modulated oscillations. The block diagrams of both channels are identical.
The principle of telegraph pulse transmission with the aid of frequency
modulated oscillations was described in Chapter I, The frequency bands
occupied by the telegraph channels within the frequency spectrum transmitted
? by the radio-relay are shown in Figure 2.
241. The telegraph channel is composed of a transmitter receiver, and
of a line unit. The transmitter serves for the conversion of d.c. pulses
coming from the line into frequency modulated oscillations. It consists
of a relay PN, an ultrasonic frequency generator G9 a matching attenuator T,
and a band-pass filter FTG (Figure 57).
242. . The receiver serves for the conversion of the received frequency
modulated oscillations into d.c. pulses. It consists of a receiving filter
FTG, an amplifier (which is also an amplitude limiter), a frequency
detector Lalscriminatv_7, cuproxide rectifiers, and a receiving relay PO
4111 (Figure 58).
lb SECRET
/ 243,
50X1-H UN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
up SECRET
? 58 ?
50X1 -HUM
243. /Eome words obliteratef connects the line circuits with the
ultrasonic circuits.
The ultrasonic frequency generator
244. The ultrasonic frequency generator operates with inductive
coupling Zfeed-bacg. The resonant circuit is in the grid circuit of the
valve, and is composed of the coils L, L113(132)9 and of the capacitors
0117(147) and C118(148)1 The generator circuit diagram is shown in Figure
59. The generator valve L-6(8) is connected as a triode. The resistor
R118(150) inserj,ed in the cathode circuit permits the valve operation to
be tested.
245. The generator oscillation frequency depends on the position of
102(104)1
the arm of the transmitting relay P When the arm touches the left-
hand contact L (Figure 59), then the resonant circuit consists of the
inductance coils L, L,1130 /32) connected in series, and of the capacitors
?117(147) 0118(148) connected in parallel. In this case the first telegraph
'
channel generator oscillates at a frequency of 8500 c/s, and the second tele-
graph channel - at a frequency of 12200 c/s.
246. When the P102(104) transmitting relay arm touches the right-
hand contact 1:), then part of the coil L113(132) is short-circuited to ground
(its inductance is reduced), and the capacitor 01/8(148) is connected into
the circuit through the very high resistance of the resistor R119(151)9 so
that in practice it is disconnected. In this case about two lines
obliteratef during the passage of the arm from one contact to the other,
the generator resonant circuit consists of: the coils L + L113(132) and of
the capacitor 0117(147). The capacitor 0118(148) is then disconnected from
/ the circuit...
* The numbers in brackets refer to the appropriate components
of the second telephone LL27 channel.
SECRET
50X1 -HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SECRET
59 -
50X1 -HUM
the circuit the first telegraph channel generator generates oscillations of
the frequency of 8300 c/s, and the second telegraph channel generator
oscillates at a frequency of 12500 c/s.
247. The voltage developed across the second winding of the trans-
former is applied to the band-pass filter FTg-2 (FTg-4) through the voltage
divider (attenuator) R115(147)9 R1/4(146)9 which makes it possible to
select the right level at the channel output.
The tele_grlajalLs_i_gaa_Leseiver
248. The telegraph signal receiver is composed of an amplitude
limiter stage, an amplifier, and frequency and amplitude detectors (Figure
60). The frequency modulated telegraph signals are separated by the
filters FTg-1 (FTg-3) from the whole spectrum of the received signal fre-
quencies (Figure 2), and they are then applied through the transformer
Tr101(102) to the control grid of the amplifier valve L-5(7) (Figure 60).
To this grid is also applied the composite grid bias, namely the voltage
drop across the resistor R107(139) connected to the cathode circuit of the
valve, and the voltage drop across the resistor R106(138), due to the
grid current. The amplitude limitation for the purpose of elimination of
the parasitic amplitude modulation of the signal, is obtained in this circuit
by the grid current of the valve. The limitation starts at the transformer
Tr 101(102) input voltage of 0.25 to 0.3 V. The resistor R108(140) serves
for testing the valve operation.
249. Two resonant circuits, C1,-.
lzk142) L109(128)9 1110(129) and
0113(143)9 L111(130)9 connected in series in the anode circuit of the valve,
constitute the frequency detector 2Tiscriminatoil which, together with the
cuproxide rectifiers, converts the frequency modulated oscillations into
d.c. pulses. These current pulses flow through the windings of the
receiving relayF101(103) so that the arm of this relay
'
reproduces the d.c.
50X1 -HUN
/ telegraph
SECRET
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
IIIPSECRET
50X1 -HUM
- 60 -
telegraph pulses within the line circuit of the telegraph instrument. The
resonant circuits in the anode circuit of the valve L-5(7) are tuned in the
first telegraph channel to the frequency of 8500 c/s and 9100 c/s, and in
the second telegraph channel - to the frequencies of 12200 c/s and 12800 c/s.
250. The variable inductance coil L109(128) serves for tuning the
circuit to the lower frequency of the 'belegraph signal.
251. The variable resistor R120(152) serves for the maintenance of
the current balance in the windings of the receiving relay.
252. In Figure 61 is shown the frequency characteristic of the tele-
graph channel receiver, which gives the graph of the dependence of the
currents in the receiving relay windings on the degree of de-tuning f
in relation to the average frequency of the channel (8.8 kc/s or 12.5 kc/s
respectively).
11.10_12nA:p.ass filters of the teleraph
channels
253. The receiving filter FT,g-1, and transmi'Aing filter Tg-2, of
the first telegraph Channel are designed for the pass-band of 8400 to 9200
c/s. The receiving filter FTg,-3 and transmitting filter FT0--4 of the second
telegraph channel are designed for the pass-band of 12100 to 12900 c/s. At
the other channel frequencies, the first telegraph channel filters introduce
an attenuation of not less than 3 N., and the second telegraph channel
filters - of not less than 3.5 N. The attenuation characteristic of the,
telegraph channel band-pass filters is shown in Figure 51 (curves land 4).
The filter coils are wound on alsifer rings of type T00C-55. Mica capaci-
tors are used in the filters. Filters are hermetically sealed.
254. The ted characteristic impedance value of the filters is 600
ohms.
The line_12tion
255. The line portion of the telegraph channels permits the following
modes of telegraph equipment operation: 50X1 -HUN
uni-directional
3C?ACC I
9684
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
IS SECRET
- 61 -
?
50X1 -HUM
- uni-directional (single-polarity) pulse operation, with
un-separated directions of transmission and reception
2:Le.9 single-channel operationf (operation of the sets ST-35
in a simplex system);
- uni-directional (single-polarity) pulse operation, with
separate directions of transmission and reception flouble-
channel operation (operation of the sets ST-35 in a duplex
system);
two-directional (double-polarity) pulse operation, with
separate directions of transmission and reception (operation of
the Baudot instruments).
256. During uni-directional operation of the ST-35 sets in a simplex
system, five windings are used in the transmitting relay (Figure 62a).
Two windings (1-2 and 3-4) of 1250 turns each, and connected in parallel,
form the line windings. The line windings circuit is closed through the
receiving relay contacts. The next two windings (5-8) of 1250 turns each,
are connected in series, and serve for the holding of the transmitting relay
arm in position, should the receiving relay be activated accidentally. The
? fifth winding (12-13) of 5000 turns serves for shifting the arm from the
right hand to the left hand contact, when a no-current pulse arrives from the
line. In this case the line circuits are supplied from the side of the ST-35
set.
257. During duplex operation of the ST-35 sets, the receiving and the
transmitting circuits are separated (Figure 62b), and therefore the
winding 5-8 is not required. The line circuits in this case are also
supplied from the side of the ST-35 sets.
258. During two-directional fl'ouble-polarit operation of the Baudot
? instruments with separated transmission and reception direction instruments
(Figure 62o), only the windings 1-2 and 3-4 are used as in this case the
,111111VSIti--MT
50X1 -HUN
/ operation...
50X'
L nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SECRET
- 62 -
operation is carried out with the aid of the two-directional ffouble-
50X1-HUM
polarit currents. A voltage supplying the line circuits (- 60 V) is
applied to the receiving relay contacts. The transmitting relay is supplied
from the side of the Baudot instrument.
259. The switch-over of the telegraph channels from one mode of
operation to the other is done by means of the rocking keys K102 and K104
which are located on the front panel of the multiplexing unit.
260. In all cases the "earth" is brought to the telegraph instrument
either by a seIarate wires Or the same purpose can be served by the mid-
point of the telephone service line between the station and the telegraph
exchange. For the purpose of connecting the telegraph instruments with
the radio-relay station use can also be made of the mid-points of the
repeating coils connected to the telephone lines between the station and the
signals 5ommunicationg centre.
261. Resistors R131 and R164 in the telegraph channel transmitting
circuits serve for the adjustment of the rated current values (25 mA for
Baudot, and 50 mA for the ST-35 sets). The shafts of these resistors are
brought out through the front panel of the unit and are located in the
apertures marked with a sign "Prad lin." flino currents. In order to
carry out the receiving relay balance adjustment, when the radio-relay is
used with the Baudot instruments, the shafts of the resistor R 577 and
130LE/
R164E' AT.. which are marked "Rownowazenie" fBalancing"7, are brought out
through the front panel of the multiplexing unit.
262. The operation of the telegraph channels can be tested by measur-
ing the currents of the transmitting valves L-6 and L-8, and of the receiving
valves L-5 and L-7, and also the currents in the windings of receiving
relays P101 and P103, and the transmitting relays P102 and P104 (the line
currents during the transmission)*
SECRET
/ 263. 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1 -HUM
?
?
SECRET
? 63 ?
263. The design of the multiplexing unit permits the testing of the
channel efficiency without using the telegraph instruments by means of the
so called "Self-contained operation" raca na siebig. The telegraph
Channels can operate when the station is used either as a terminal station,
or av an intermediate 27epeatei7 station. There is also. provision for the
extraction of any telegraph channel from the intermediate station.
The linemnal
264. The line panel is used for .connectirg the telephone and telegraph
lines coming from the communiceions centre, in the case when Oe equipment
is removed for operation outside the truck (operation by remote control).
The external view of the line table is shown in Figure 63.
265. During operation from the truck, the line panel is connected by
a cable to the appropriate panel of input terminals located outside on the
truck body, and to the multiplexing unit (Block 2).
266. On the line panel and on the input terminals panel there are two
rows of similarly numbered terminals, serving for the connection of the
lines brought up to the station, The purpose of each terminal is marked
on the line panel.
267. The line panel is Provided with lightning protection of the
lines. In each lead circuit there is a 0.25 A fuse and a mica lightning
arrester.
268. Each line panel has two line transformers with centre taps.
With the aid of a switch, any telegraph channel can be connected to the
centre tap of any transformer, and when the two-wire line connecting the
station to the communications centre 5xchang27 can be used simultaneously
for telephone and telegraph operation. Mounted on the line panel is the
bell of the appropriate half-set.
411111104ECRET
50X1 -HUM
5. Power Suulz_HELL....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
?
?
le SECRET
- 64 -
5. Power lu_p_ply_..U.:4!
Bleck dia am of the station power_p_ma
269. The block diagram of the station power supply is shown in
Figure 64. The principal, primary source of the station electric power
supply are the storage batteries. Each half-set of the station has three
groups of batteries. Each group consists of two batteries type 5 NI-45
of a rated voltage of 12 V.
270. The batteries are connected to the appropriate half-set
charging panels by means of flexible cables SZ-8.
271. From the charging panel, the voltage from the operating battery
group is brought to the rectifier unit through the cable SZ,3, (Block 3)
and to the lamps illuminating the interior of the truck through the cables
K-3 and K-4.
272. From the rectifier unit, the voltage is applied through the con-
nector S2-1-,?3 to Block 2 (connector SZ-1-2) and to Block 1 (connectors
SZ-1-1A ). The batteries are charged from a petrol-driven generator set
type PES-0.75, comprising an engine type 2 SD and a generator fclynam27
GSK-1500. The station is equipped with two such power supply sets,
4110 273. In order to charge the batteries, the generator set should be
removed from the truck and connected to the input terminal panel by means
of cable N-3 (half-connector "12-27 V"). The half-connectors "12-27 V"
on the input terminal panels are connected by a cable S7-9 to the charging
panels inside the truck.
274. The adjustable field voltage for the generator GSK-1500 is
applied through the cables N-3 and SZ-9. The charging panels are connected
with each other by means of the cable SZ-11. This makes it possible to
charge any battery group of any half-set from one generator set by connecting
it to any input terminal panel. Not more than three battery groups can
be charged simultaneously (in any sequence).
SECRET
/ 275. 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
ft/SECRET
? 65
50X1 -HUM
275. When the station is supplied from the batteries, then the
anode and screen circuits, as well as the grid bias circuits are supplied
from vibrator converters.
276. Three vibrator converters form part of each half-set;
- the transmitter vibrator converter;
- the receiver and the multiplexing unit vibrator converter;
- the telegraph circuit supply vibrator converter.
277. The station can also be supplied frcm 127/220 V a.c. mains.
For this purposa each half-set is provided with a rectifier unit (Block 3).
The a.c. is brought to the station through the cable N-4, connected to the.
half-connector marked "127/220 V" on any input terminal panel. The station
is equipped with three N-4 cables, two of them 25 m. long, and one 50 m.
long. The half-connectors "127/220 V" mounted on the input terminal panel,
are interconnected in parallel through the cable K-1, The voltage from the
mains is brought to the mains attachment by the cable SZ-10 from the half-
connector "127/220 VI' of the left-hand input terminal panel. The mains
attachment serves for the connection and adjustment of the voltage from the
mains, which is brought up to the rectifier unit through the cable SZ-4, and
to the lamps lighting the interior of the truck through the cable K-5.
278. From the rectifier unit, the rectified voltage is fed through the
connectors SZ-1-3 to the appropriate units of the equipment.
The charing panel
279. Inside the metal housing of the charging panel (Figure 65) are
located:
- one single-pole on-and-off laminated 5akietow?switch of the
petrol-driven mobile generator;
- three double-pole, three-way? changeover, laminated battery
switches;
50X1 -HUM
one change-over voltmeter switch;
1110v SECRET
/ - generator....
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
? 66 ?
50X1 -HUM
- generator field rheostat;
- reverse current relay;
- three rheostats and other elements for charging current
adjustment.
280. ,All the switches and the rheostat knobs are located on the front
panel of the charging panel. In addition, on the front panel are located
three ammeters of 20 A range, a voltmeter of 30 V range, and four pilot
findicatoil lamps.
281. On the lower part of the battery charging panel, behind hinged
flaps, there are four fuees: one 50 A fuse in the charging assembly circuit,
and three 15 A fuses, one in each of the storage battery group charging
circuit. In parallel with the 50 A fuse there is a pilot lamp marked "AGR"
obile generatog and in parallel with the 15 A fuses there are pilot lamps
marked "I", "II", "III", which correspond to the numeration of the storage.
battery groups,
282. On the lower board of the battery charging panel there are four
half-connectors for cables SZ-8, SZ-3, SZ-9 and SZ-11, two terminals marked
12 V" and 12 V", and also the earth connector which serves at the same
time as a common negative (- 12 V). In addition, on the right hand side
wall of the panel there is a socket marked "12 V" for connecting the
soldering iron, or the portable lighting lamp, On the left-hand side wall
there is a socket for connection of the relay and telegraph channel adjust-
ment instrument.
283. The battery charging panel is fixed to the wall of the truck body
by means of a bar welded to its rear wall.
284. The battery charging panel makes it possible to:
- connect the petrol-driven generator for battery charging;
- switch on any battery group for charging, discharging, or to
the position "WY?aczone"27Offf;
SECRET
- adjust,.,. 50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 67 -
50X1-HUM
- adjust the battery charging current;
- measure the voltage of any of the battery groups.
The vibrator converter
285. As was mentioned above, when the station operates on batteries,
the anode and screen circuits, the grid bias circuits, and the telegraph
line circuits are powered from vibrator converters. Each vibrator con-
verter is fed with a voltage of 12 V from* the battery, and serves for the
conversion of the low voltage d.c. into a much higher d.c. voltage. The
voltage step-up is obtained by converting the d.c. voltage obtained from
the battery into an a.c. voltage, stepping-up this voltage to the required
value with the aid of a transformer, and then rectifying this higher
voltage. For this purpose, use is made of a five-contact vibrator of type
WS-12. This vibrator consists of an electro-magnet A and of three groups of
static and vibrating contacts a, b, c (Figure 66). The vibrating contacts
are fixed on a common arm. The whole vibrator is located in a screening
box, covered inside with sponge rubber for damping, and for reducing the
audible noises developed by the vibrator. Within the vibrator converter,
4111 the vibrator proper is an interchangeable element.
?
286. The principle of operation of the vibrator converter can be
explained by means of the simplified circuit diagram given in Figure 66.
At standstill the contacts 6 ? 8 are closed. When the voltage from the
battery is switched on, current flows through the windings of the electro-
magnet A, which attracts the arm. As the arm is attracted by the electro-
magnet, contacts 6 - 8 open, and the current through the windings of the
electro-magnet A stops. The arm is
but, under the action of the spring,
no longer attracted to the electro-magnet
it returns to its initial position,
8. In this manner the arm begins
50X1-HUN
thus closing once more the contacts 6 ?
to vibrate.
AD SECRET
/ 287.
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?68 ?
50X1 -HUM
287. The arm vibration frequency (closing and opening the contacts)
is about 100 c/s. When the arm vibrates, the contacts 7 and 1 are
alternately connected to the negative terminal of the battery, and as a
result the current direction in the primary winding of the transformer Tr
alternates, producing an alternating magnetic field in the transformer core.
An alternating e.m.f. is thus induced in the secondary winding of the
transformer.
288. The alternating voltage induced in the secondary winding of the
transformer is n turn rectified with the aid of the stationary contacts
3 and 5 and of the vibrating contact 4.
Contact 4 located on the arm
vibrates synchronously with the other group of contacts. A full-wave
rectification of the alternating voltage takes place, and the rectified
voltage is doubled with the aid of the capacitors Ci and C2, which are
charged in turn through contacts 3 and 5. The polarity of the voltage
across the capacitors remains constant. As the capacitors are connected in
series in relation to the load, a double voltage is obtained across both
capacitors and across the load. Each vibrator converter in the .station
constitutes a separate element assembled on a rigid, cast frame. In order
to ensure prol,er screening, the frame is divided into separate compartments
closed at the top and at the bottom with metal covers.
289. For elimination of the radio frequency disturbances caused by
the vibrator, the converter includes spark-quenching circuits and anti-
interference filters.
290. The grid bias for the transmitter and receiver valves is also
obtained with the aid of the vibrator converters. For this purpose the
transformers of the transmitter and receiver vibrator converters have addi-
tional windings which supply the required voltage to the selenium rectifiers.
50X1 -HUN
/ The mains attachment
40 SECRET
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
1111rECRET
? 69 ?
50X1-HUM
The mains attachment
291. The mains attachment structurally consists of a rectangular
housing with holes in the side walls (Figure 67). Inside the housing is
an auto-transformer (130 W) and a step-down transformer Tri (Figure 68).
292. On the rear wall of the housing are located the half-connectors
for the connection of cables (SZ-4 and SZ-10), the terminals Z3 and Z4 for
tapping the 12 V voltage, the socket for the connection of the testing
voltmeter SzT1 9 and the terminal "Ziemia"Zbarthge
293. On the left hand side wall there are two 12 V sockets for the
connection of a soldering iron or a portable lamp. With the aid of the
auto-transformer, the voltage 127 V can be maintained when the mains voltage
fluctuates within the limits of - 20% to + 10% 5resumably "Variac" type
auto-transforms:70 The mains voltage is measured with the aid of a volt-
meter located on the table between the racks. The dimensions of the mains
attachment are: 263 x 137 x 231 mm. The weight o2 the attachement is 11.5 kg,
The rectifier unit
294. The rectifier unit (Block 3) is used when the station is powered
from the mains. The rectifier circuits of the unit convert the 127 V a.c.
voltage into he d.c. voltage required for the supply of the station. From
Block 3 the rectified voltages are fed to Block 1 and Block 2. The
construction and the elements of Block 3 are shown in Figures 691 70 and 71.
295. The rectifier circuits are divided into three groups. Each
group has its own transformer. The first group, connected to the trans-
former Tr1' supplies power to the transmitter and the telegraph line circuits.
In the primary winding of the transformer there is a 2 A fuse and a pilot
lamp in parallel with it. Both the fuse and the pilot lamp are located
on the front panel (first from the left). This transformer can be switched
on by means of the "mode of operation" switch "Prac.-Dyz." fOperation
111111111PSECRET
50X1-HUN
/ Stand by5....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
50X1-HUM
- 70 -
Stand bvg, which is located on the front panel of Block 1. Transformer
Tr1 has four secondary windings, and the same number of rectifiers. The
rectification takes place with the aid of full-wave bridge circuits built
on selenium elements.
296. The output voltage of the rectifier D-1 is about 170 V. In
the rectified voltage circuit there is a filter and a 0.15 A fuse with a
pilot lamp. Both the fuse and the lamp are located on the front panel of
the unit (second from the left),.
297. The output voltage of the rectifier r-2 is 25 V, which is applied
as a negative bias to the control grid of the output stage valve of the
transmitter. In the rectified voltage circuit there is a filter composed
of resistors and capacitors.
298. The output voltage of the rectifiers D-4 and D-5 is ? 60 V. It
is used for the supply of the telegraph line circuits. In the output cir-
cuit of each rectifier there is a filter and a 0.25 A fuse with a pilot
lamp located on the front panel of the unit (third and fourth from the left).
299. Resistors R3 and R4 at the output of the rectifiers D-4 and D-5
filters serve for levelling out 2Tqualisatio2 of the voltage drop after the
load is switched off. .5ot quite clear, presumably bleeder resistor.
4111 300. The second group of rectifiers, connected to the transformer
Tr2, supply power to the receiver and to the multiplexing unit. In the
transformer primary winding there is a 2 A fuse and a pilot lamp located on
the front panel of the unit (fifth from the left). The primary winding of
transformer Tr2 is switched on by means of the "type of supply" switch, which
is located in Block 1. The transformer Tr2 has three secondary windings.
The rectifier D-6 connected to the winding 11-12-13 gives a voltage of 160 V
for the supply of the receiver and multiplexing unit valves. In the recti-
fied voltage circuit there is incorporated a filter and a 0.15 A fuse with
the pilot lamp located on the front panel of the unit (seventh from the left).
50X1-HUN
/ 301.
50X1
L neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
40 SECRET
50X1-HUM
- 71 -
301. The rectifier D-7 connected to the winding 9 - 10 supplies a
voltage of 45 V for the d.c. amplifier. This voltage can be adjusted by
means of the variable resistor otentiometer7 the shaft of which is located
in a cut-out on the front panel of the unit. In the rectified voltage
circuit there is a filter composed of resistors and capacitors.
302. The centre tap (3) of the winding 1 - 5 is earthed. This
winding supplies the 12 V a.c. voltage for the filament circuits of all the
valves in the station.
303. The valve of the transmitter power amplifier draws its filament
voltage of 4.8 V from a part (2 - 4) of this winding. The transmitter
valve filament circuits can be switched on and off by means of the switch
"Prac. - Dyz." fOperation - Stand byf located on the front panel of
Block 1.
304. The third rectifier group is connected to the transformer Tr3.
In the primary winding circuit of this transformer -there is a 2 A fuse with
a pilot lamp located on the frontpanel of the unit (sixth from the left).
The primary winding of the transformer Tr, is connected in parallel with
the primary winding of the transformer Tr2' and can be switched on and off
by means of the "type of supply" switch located on the front panel of Block 1.
The transformer Tr3 has three secondary windings.
The rectifier D-89
connected to the winding 3 - 4 - 5, supplies a voltage of 12 V to the
calling signal converter, to the relay?, and to the bell.
305. The rectifier D-9, connected to the winding 6 - 7, supplies the
voltage of 12 V for the telephone channel limiter stages, to the transmitter
output valve suppressor grid, and to the microphone. At the output of the
rectifier D-9 there is a filter.
306. The windings: V of the transformer Try IV of the transformer
Tr2' and II of the transformer Tr have special taps for stepping up the
3
voltage...,
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
- 72 -
50X1 -HUM
voltage, which is necessary in the event of the aging of the selenium
rectifiers.
307. The elements of the rectifier unit are assembled on a chassis
to which the front panel is attached with bolts. The front view of the
rectifier unit is shown in Figure 69. Over the fuses located on the front
panel of the unit, are marked the values of the currents. The elements
of the unit are located both under and over the chassis (Figures 70 and 71).
308. Dimensions of the rectifier unit: 354 x 150 x 402 mm..
41111 Weight of the ulit: 15.4 kg.
309. The rectifier unit draws a current of about 1.6 A. This current
is divided among the various groups as follows:
rectifiers of the first group (Tri): - 0.44 A;
- rectifiers of the second group (Tr2): - 0.70 A;
- rectifiers of the third group (Tr): - -0.43 A.
310. The rated values of the voltages and currents supplied by the
rectifiers of Block 3 are apecified in Appendix 6.
The petrol-driven mobile generatorlsm12%-LacirE
311. For charging of the station batteries use is made of a petrol-
driven mobile generator type PES-0.75, consisting of a one-cylinder, two-
stroke engine type 2 SD, and a four-pole, shunt d.c. generator type GSK-1500
,(Figure 72).
312. Technical specification of the 2 SD engine:
powers - 2 HP
- r.p.m.: - 3000
- cooling: - air
- petrol tank capacity: - 3.75 litres
- petrol consumption: - 0.9 kg/hour
- weight of engine: - 20 kg.
\-- fuel: - petrol A-66.
el SECRET
50X1 -HUM
/ 313, 50X1
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 -
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
111!k?' cFrDFT
?
? 73 ?
313. Technical specification of the GSK 1500 generator:
- rated power:
- rated voltage:
-1 rated current:
rated r.p.m.:
operation conditions:
weight (not exceeding): - 12.6 kg.
? 1000 W
- 24V
-36A
- 3000
- continuous rating
50X1-HUM
314. A detailed description of the design and operation of various
? elements of the engine is given in the special PES-0.75 instruction manual,
"Instruction for the maintenance, operation and adjustment of the 2 SD
engine".
315.
Weight of the PES-0.75 assembly is 55 kg.
64 Aerial and Mast Equipment
316. Each station is equipped with two complete sets of the aerial-
mast assembly. Each set is composed of two "Yagi" type aerials forming a
cruciform structure, of aerial feeders, of a mast with a hoist, and of the
mast rigging.
The aerial assembly
317. The receiving and the transmitting aerials of each half-set are
assembled on a common horizontal boom at right-angles to each other, and
form one cruciform structure. The vertical aerial is tuned to the frequenby
of 69 Mc/s, and covers the frequency range of 68 to 70 Mc/s (operating
waves 28 to 54). The horizontal aerial is tuned to the frequency of 67 Mc/s,
and covers the frequency range of 66 to 68 Mc/s (operating waves 1 to 27).
The horizontal aerial dipoles are marked with white stripes.
318. The whole of the aerial assembly is collapsible., The dipoles
? are fixed on the aerial boom by means of special clamps. The active dipoles
of the aerial are half-wave dipoles connected to the receiver or the trans-
mitter by a feeder cable.
SIECRET
319.
50X1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
MO SECRET
- 74 -
50X1 -HUM
319. In order to eliminate distortions of the aerial radiation
pattern the feeder is connected to the dipole through a balancing device
5a11.1g. The balancing devices of the vertical and of the horizontal
aerials are located inside the aerial boom. The half-connectors for the
connection of the aerial feeders to the aerials are located under the
aerial boom, behind the reflector. The vertical aerial half-connector is
painted white, and the half-connector of the horizontal aerial is painted
with camouflage paint.
11111 320. Whe attaching the aerial to the aerial boom, it is necessary to
pay attention to the numbers marked on the dipoles and their clamps. The
aerial boom, together with the aerials, is attached by a special clamp to
the wooden insulator which forms the end section of the mast. The external
view of the deployed aerials of both half-sets is shown in Figure 11.
321. When the station is dismantled, all the elements of the aerial
assembly are packed inside a duraluminium case (Figure 10), which is carried
under the body of the truck. Each station has two cases with aerials.
322. Figures 73 and 74 show the horizontal radiation patterns of both
aerials (vertical and horizontal) of the R-401 station, and the widths of the
principal lobs of these patterns.
The aerial feeders (cables)
323. For the connection of the aerials located-on the mast to the
receiver and the transmitter of the station, use is made of a coaxial cable
(feeder) of type RK-1, which has a characteristic impedance of 75 ohms.
Each half-set has two feeders, 25 metres long.
324. At each end, the feeders are terminated with half-connectors.
The half-connector of the vertical aerial is marked with white paint.
325. Before the erection of the mast, the feeders are fixed with a
special clamp to the base of the wooden section of the mast.
4110 SECRET
/ 326.
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
- 75 -
50X1 -HUM
326. The feeders are carried inside the aerial packing cases.
The mast and the mast hoist
327. Each station has two collapsible masts and two hoists. One
mast is composed of nine sections. The top section is made of wood. It
is 2 m, long and serves as an insulator. The other eight sections of the
mast are made of duraluminium tubes, 1.6 metres long, one fitting into the
other.
328. The mast hoist is 2 metres long, and is also made of duraluminium
? tube. It has a winch for lifting the mast, and a mechanism for holding
the mast when lifted. The hoist has a metal base at the bottom, on which
the whole mast rests.
329. In order to erect the mast, the mast sections are fastened one
after another to the hoist and then lifted up.
330. The total height of the mast is 14.5 metres. The mast is held
in a vertical position by means of twelve guy-ropes fixed at four different
levels. At each level there are three guy-ropes a.c., an angle of 1200 to one
another. The guy-rope fixing pegs are driven into the ground at a distance
of 8 metres from the mast base. The pegs form the corners of an equilateral
triangle (Figure 75).
331. The mast, when erected, can be turned around its axis. To hold
the aerial in the desired position, there are two additional guy-ropes fixed
to the ends of the aerial boom.
332. Sections of the mast are carried in a metal case attached under-
neath the truck body. The hoists together with the top, wooden, sections
of the mast are attached to the body of the truck on both sides of the
driver's cabin. The winch and the locking mechanism of the hoists is
protected with covers.
?
-1110 SECRET
/ 21mina 50X1-HU
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? 76 ?
50X1 -HUM
333. The rigging of the mast is composed of three metal pegs, twelve
guy-ropes and three half-rings. A mallet which is included in the station
equipment, is used for driving the pegs into the ground. All the guy-ropes
are made of a steel cable, the strands of which consist of 2 mm. diameter
. wires.
334. At the top ends of the guy-ropes there are locking hooks or
ordinary hooks for attaching the guy-ropes to the half-rings which are inserted
into the grooves between the math; sections. At each level, two guy-ropes
have locking hooks, and one has an ordinary hook.
335. In order to facilitate the erection of the mast, the lower ends
of the guy-ropes are prolonged with hemp ropes, and have small wooden boards
for adjusting the length of the guy-ropes. When the station is packed up,
the rigging of the masts is contained in special packings (see Figure 10)9
*which are stored in the right-hand case inside the truck.
50X1 -HUP
50X1
npriaccifipc-i in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? 77 ?
CHAFTER III
OPERATION OF THE R-401 STATION
50X1 -HUM
1. a-otection of the Station against Damage
336. The proper handling of the equipment is a necessary condition
for the maintenance of reliable and uninterrupted communication.
337. When using the station it ie necessary to:
- pay attention to the mains or battery voltage;
- protect the equipment and the interior of the truck against
dust and dirt;
when repairing the equipment or when removing it from the
truckk to protect it against shocks and knocks.;
- handle carefully the feeders and the connecting cables, and
take care to maintain their efficiency;
- protect the aerial mast section joints against dirt;
- avoid throwing the aerial mast sections when setting up or
dismantling the aerial;
- protect the aerial doles against dirt and humidity, and
prevent any bending of the dipoles;
- handle very carefully the aerial feeders and cables during
deployment and dismantling of the aerial. Avoid kinking them,
especially during winter;
- when in transit, make sure that the blocks in the racks are
properly secured and protected with covers;
- carry out the tests and technical examinations (Appendix 2).
338. The spare parts and accessories should always be in their proper
places, and should be properly secured.
2. Choice of Site_1211_1th222212man:Uf_tts_at2I12n
339. When setting up the station in the field, the following factors
1111114ECR should b 50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
-78-
50X1 -HUM
should be considered:
- location of the command posts;
conditions of radio wave propagation, (ground);
vehicular accessibility and equipment unloading facilities;
concealment and camouflage of the station;
- the necessity of protecting the station;
- necessity of protecting the station against industrial inter-
ference, against interference by other stations, and against
deliberate jamming by the enemy.
3406 The radio-relay station should be sited in conformity with
principles of anti-nuclear defence.
3449 The terminal radio-relay stations should as a rule be located
as near as possible to the communications centres. This reduces the
number of cables required for the construction of the connecting links,
and also improves the quality and reliability of communication. The
distance between the terminal stations and the communications centres
depends upon the specific conditionsl the capacity of the equipment, and
the type of cable used for the connecting links. The permissible attenu-
ation for telephone lines is 1.25 Ne
342. The connecting wire lines, inTite of their short length as
compared with the radio-relay links, form an important element which exerts
a considerable influence upon the continuity and reliability of the whole
radio link operation. It is recommended that the connecting lines should
use ak, and that they should be kept under constant supervision.
343. In an afforested, moderately undulating terrain, or in a steppe,
in order to ensure communications over short distances, if the masts are
erected to their full height, no special care in the choice of route is
necessary.
344. Practical experience has shown that it is possible to maintain
infallible communication even if the line of sight of the aerials of 50X1 -HUM
/ corresponding 50X1
ariSECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
4111100SECRET
? 79 ?
corresponding stations is interrupted by a ground obstacle 50 to 75 metres
high. An example of such a route is shown in Figure 76. It should,
however, be borne in mind that a prior careful selection of a radio-relay
route may considerable increase the stability (certainty) and range of
communication.
345. Over open routes (free from obstructions? Figure 77) it is
possible to maintain communication between two stations at considerable
distances. It is possible therefore, in certain cases, to avoid using
intermediate stations, or to reduce their number, if the ground conditions
and tactical considerations permit the selection of open routes,
34-6.
With a careful selection of the radio-relay route (with the
50X1-HUM
smallest obstacle on the optical line-of-sight) it is possible to reduce the
height of the aerials, which facilitates the camouflage of the station, and
also makes more difficult the interception of messages and jamming of the
station by the enemy.
347. For the above reasons, it is advisable to operate the station
at reduced heights of the aerials even for long distance communication.
348. The erection of the aerial mast at less than full height
requires much less time, and therefore reduces the time required for
establishing communication. It is, however, necessary to bear in mind that
in the presence of obstructions on the route, a reduction of the height of
the aerial may affect the quality, or even cause an interruption of
communication.
349.
For this reason, in order to ensure a good quality of communi-
cation when operating at reduced aerial height, it is necessary to Check
the profile of the route and select either an unobstructed route, or a
route with as few ground obstructions as possible.
? 350. Selection of an unobstructed route or a route with few obstruc-
tions is of a great importance, especially at a long distance between the
stations 50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
-80-
50X1 -HUM
stations, and when there are more than two intermediate re-transmitting
stations.
351. In mountainous areas it may happen that communication will have
to be established not only across open routes, but also across routes with
considerable obstructions in the shape of .mountain ridges. In this case
the station should be placed at least at such a distance from the obstruc-
ting mountain that the top of the mountain is visible from the station.
Figure 78 shows the profile of a mountain route on which continuous communi-
cation was maintained even with an obstacle about 450 m high.
352. The selection of a radio-relay route is made on a map. The
procedure when selecting a route is described beloW.
353. The site for the deployment of the station should be selected
so as to ensure a proper clearance between the aerials Of the stations in
correspondence. Steep slopes of plateaux, high embankments stone and
reinforced concrete buildings, metal structures and transverse power and
communication lines situated in front of the aerials, all have a screening
effect upon metre-wave propagation. The station should therefore be
placed as far as possible from the above features, It is advisable, on
the other hand, to utilize them for hindering the enemy from interception
and jamming&
354. The area required for the deployment of one aerial is 15 x 15
metres, and for two aerials 30 x 15 metres.
355. The distance between the aerials of adjoining half-sets of the
station should be about 16 to 20 metres, and the distance between the mast
and the truck should be about 10 metres,
356. The aerials of different half-sets should be located in such
a manner that they do not interfere with one another when radiating.
357. The correct lay-out of the aerials is shown in Figure 79.
358. To avoid interference from industrial sources which may affect
the quality of communication; the stations should be placed at least 300
11110SECRET
/ to 500 metres 050X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
411111rSECRET
? 81 ?
50X1 -HUM
to 500 metres away from roads, industrial buildings, garages, electric rail-
ways, high-voltage power lines, powerful short-wave stations, and radar
sets.
359. When siting the station according to the principles of anti-
_
nuclear defence, one should remember to arrange proper field engineering
protection, and camouflage of the station site.
360.
The truck must be placed inside a concealed trench. The trench
should be 0.5 m deeper than the height of the truck. The fuel and lubri -
cants should be placed in a special trench 20 to 25 metres distant from the
trench with the truck. The area around the FOL dump should be cleared of
all inflammable materials and objects.
361. In case of necessity, the station equipment can be removed from
the truck and placed in a shelter.
3620 When operating by remote control, the units are fixed on a
special cruciform structure. It is forbidden to place the equipment in
front of the entrance to the shelter.
363. When arranging the shelter for remote control operation, it is
necessary to provide for:
- outlets for two aerial feeders, and for
careful camouflaging and burying of the
a depth of 20 to 40 cms in the ground;
- electric power supply for the station (spare storage
and their charging);
- sites for the proper deployment of the aerials,
seven two-wire lines;
feeders and cables at
batteries
and their camouflage;
- spare parts, and operational accessories (aerials, feeders, aerial
sections, guy-ropes, radio valves, fuses, etc.).
364. The shelter should have a telephone connection with the tele-
phone exchange. When the station is deployed at a considerable distance
from the communications centre, service communication can be established
with the aid of portable ultra-short-wave radio sets.
411. SECRET / 365.
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
eirSECRET
-82-
365. During combat; when there is not enough time for building
covers and shelters, in order to establish communication the station may be
deployed without a specially prepared place of concealment* In such a
case, however, one should ,utilize the camouflage characteristics of the
ground. Gorges, ravines, ditches, subterranean structures, caves, etc.
can be used for concealment, At the same time work should start on the
preparation of concealment and shelters for the personnel and equipment,
? 3. Selection of the Radio-relay Route
366. The radio-relay route is selected with the aid of maps on a
50X1 -HUM
scale of 1150,000 or 1100,000. The work carried out with the help of the
maps consists of a study of the terrain between the points where the radio-
relay communication is to be established, and of the division of the select-
ed route into re-transmission sections,
367, The sites for the radio-relay stations are selected according
to the requirements given in Chapter III, section 2*
368. It is recommended that the radio-relay route should be select-
ed in the following way. The sites of the aerials, and the highest points
of the terrain are marked on the map (Figure 80).
369. In Figure 80 the terminal stations are located at points A and
D, and the intermediate [re-transmission] station is at point B.
370. The approximate assessment of the route consists of the compari-
son of half of the sum of altitudes of points A and B (mean value including
the heights of the masts), with the sum of the highest altitude on the
route between the points A and B, and the height of the arc of the
curvature of the earth, corresponding to the given distance between the
points A and B.
? 371. If one half of the sum of the altitudes of the points A and B
is greater than the sum of the altitudes of the highest point and the height
of the arc of the curvature of the earth, then at the first approximation
SECR
/ it can be mem
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? 83 ?
50X1-HUM
it can be considered that the line-of-sight between the aerials located at
points A and B is unobstructed. In the opposite case, the line-of-sight
is Obstructed. The difference between the first and the second value
indicates the degree of the obstruction of the optical line-of-Sight.
372. The rise of the arc of the curvature of the earth is approxim-
ately expressed in the following formula:
R2
H =
50
where: R - distance in kilometres,
H - height of the curvature arc in metres.
373. As an example, let. us check whether there is an unobstructed,
line-of-sight between the aerials of the stations located at points A and B.
The distance between the stations, estimated from the map is Ri= 50 kms.
Assuming that the masts of both stations are 14 metres high, the altitudes
of the aerials above sea level will be:
at point Ai
174.2
+ 14
= 188.2 m.
at point B:
16040
+ 14
=174.0 m4
Half of the sum of altitudes of the aerials above sea level is:
188.2 + 174.0 =181.1 m.
2
The height of the earth curvature arc is:
H 50 x 50 = 50 m.
50
The sum of the altitude of point C and the height of the earth curvature is
160 + 50 = 210 m.
374. By comparing the value of half of the sum of the aerial
altitudes with the sum of the altitude of the highest Obstruction on the
route and the height of the earth curvature, we find that the first value
is less than the second. It can be stated therefore that there is no
direct, unobstructed line-of-sight between the aerials,
375. From the above example it can be seen that the obstruction in
SECRET
he sector
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1 -HUM
the sector AB (Figure 80) amounts to 210 - 181.1 = 28.9 m. Since, in the
ease of the R-410 rnalo-relay the permissible height of the obstruction on
the route is 50 to 75 metres, it can be assumed that it is possible to
establish communication along this route.
-
376. By similar calculation, it is easy to prove that in the sector
BD there is a direct, unobstructed line-of-sight between the aerials (Figure
80).
377. For the accurate determination of the route profile, it is
4111 necessary to draw the arc of the earth curvature and then plot onto it all
?
the principal heights along the route,. In order to trace such an arc,
one first calculates its height with the help of the above formula. One
then marks a series of points as shown in Figure 81, where A and B are the
sites of the stations, and C, D El Fp G are the supplementary points.
Through these points is traced a curve which corresponds to the arc of the
earth curvature.
3780 On the arc are plotted on an appropriate scale the altitudes of
various heights along the route, as read from the map. These points,
connected by a continuous line give the profile of the route (Figure 82).
379? example: trace the arc Of the earth curvature for a 50 km
long sector of the route.
H = 50 m,
8H
= 8.3 km. m. 0.36 R = ita = 25 m.
6 9 2
380. The earth curvature arc traced with the aid of the above
values will appear as shown in Figure 83.
381. Instead of tracing the earth curvature arc every time it sis
also possible to use special tracing forms which are prepared in advance.
The routes traced with the aid of such forms are shown in Figure 76 and 77.
SECRET
50X1-HU
4. Selection....
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
-85-
50X1 -HUM
4, Selection of the Operating Frequencies
382. A very important problem when preparing the documents necessary
for the organisation of radio-relay communication, is the selection of the
operating and. reserve frequencies,
383* If the operational frequencies are selected incorrectly, then
the transmitter of the neighbouring half-set of the station, or the trans-
mitters of other stations nearby, may interfere with the operation of the
receiver.
384, In the case when a powerful signal from an interfering trans-
mitter enters the input of the receiver, its capacity for the reception of
signals from the station in correspondence will be reduced, In addition,
an audible beat frequency may appear at the receiver output resulting from
the coincidence of the interfering signal with the signal frim the station
in correspondence.
385. When selecting the operational waves,one should be guided by the
principles laid down in this manual. It has also been found in practice
that the harmonics of the short-wave and ultra-short-wave transmitters of
other stations interfere seriously with the operation of the radio-relay
stations located nearby. The simultaneous operation of such transmitters
and of the radio-relay stations located in their vicinity can be carried
out without interference only when the operational frequencies are so
distributed that the harmonics of the short-wave and the ultra-short-wave
transmitters do not coincide with the frequency of the signal received by
the radio-relay station. The above remarks should be especially taken
into consideration when the radio-relay stations are being used for remote
Control.
?
386.
5. aplaTent and Dismantling of the Station.
Deployment of the aerial and mast equipment
The aerial and mast equipment is deployed by the station
personnel composed of five persons. The deployment is carried out under
4111WSECRET
50X1 -HUM
/ the supervision 6.. 50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
to SECRET
?86?
50X1 -HUM
the supervision of the station commander*
387. The deployment of the aerial and mast equipment is performed in
two stages:
? assembling the aerial and installing the hoist;
- raising the mast;
Lk few- words missing] " 601,em on the command of the station
commander: "Begin to deploy the aerial".
388. At this command the members of the station team take the
following actit
- Number One selects and indicates the aerial site;
- Numbers Two and Three take out the cases with the aerial and
carry them to the aerial site;
- Number Four takes out the cover with the aerial mast rigging
from its cases and carries it to the aerial site;
Number Five removes from the truck the hoist with the
wooden section of the mast, and carries it to the aerial
site;
- Numbers Four and Five carry the mast sections to the aerial site;
- Number One removes the aerial cables (feeders) from the case
and unrolls them from the truck to the mast in such a way that
they do not interfere with the deployment of the station, and
then connects the cables to the aerial and the station equip-
ments according to the assigned operational wave-lengths,
Remark
The aerial feeder with white markings, should be connected
to the aerial having a half-connector painted white (vertical
aerial). The unmarked feeder should be connected to the
aerial with half-connector painted in camouflage colour
(horizontal aerial). The covers of the aerial half-connector
and of the aerial cable half-connectors should be tied together.
When connecting the aerial cables (feeders) to the equipment
it must be borne in mind that the aerials are tuned to different
frequencies, The horizontal aerial is tuned to the frequencies
of the first half of the frequency range (unmarked 50X1 -HUM
11111#SECR
/ cable) . . ..50X1
I I
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
-87-
50X1-HUM
cable), and the vertical aerial is tuned to the frequencies
of the second half of the frequency range (cable marked white).
? Number Three removes the aerial boom with the mast end piece
from the chest, and holds it in his hands while the mast is
being assembled.
- Number Two removes the dipoles from the chest and fixes them
to the appropriate points on the aerial boom.
Remarks
1) The upper, vertical dipoles, marked with a white stripe should
be fixed in the upper vertical sockets of the aerial boom,
which are painted white, and according to the numbering on the
dipoles and on the sockets. The lower vertical dipoles are
not fixed at this stage.
,2) The horizontal dipoles (without the white stripes) are fixed In
the horizontal sockets of the aerial boom, according to the
numbering on the dipoles and on the sockets.
3) In order to fix the dipole correctly in its socket, one should;
insert the dipole into the socket as far as it will go; turn
the dipole clockwise in the socket, again as far as it will go,
and then pull the dipole towards oneself.
- Man-110er Five holds the hoist in a vertical position, and removes
cover from the hoist.
- Number Four removes the guy-rope pegs from the packing, and
drives, them into the ground 8 metres from the base of the
mast at points indicated by Number One. He then removes from
the packing the guy-ropes of the first level, attaches them to
the top part of the hoist, and. then unrolls them towards the
pegs.
Remark
The pegs should be driven into the ground at an angle of 45?
leaning away from the mast. When the aerial is assembled
(without the lower halves of the vertical dipoles) it is then
fixed to the top of the wooden section of the hoist.
389. For this purpose;
1111 - Number Five inclines the hoist;
- Numbers Two and Three attach the aerial to the wooden section
the hoist;
41111P SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
III SECRET
-88-
50X1-HUM
of the hoist;
Number Five lifts the hoist back to the vertical position;
Number TWO fixes the lower dipoles of the aerial;
Number Three takes out the ropes and attaches them to the aerial;
- Number Four secures the guy-ropes to the pegs and tightens them,
thus steadying the hoist;
- Number One checks whether the hoist is vertical, and aims the
aerial towards the correspondent station;
Numbers Two, Three and Four unroll the guy-ropes of tit. 2nd,
3rd, and 4th level from the hoist towards the pegs.
390. On the command of Number One: "Begin to raise the mast", the
following action is taken:
- Number Two hoists up the wooden section of the mast with the
aerial, then takes the duraluminium section of the mast, puts
it into the socket in the wooden section, and turns it to make the
pin enter the groove, places the holder of the hoist under the
lower end of the mast section, and hoists upwards the mast with
the aerial until the groove for the half-ring with guy-ropes is
above the supporting mechanism of the hoist;
? NuMber One fastens the aerial cables (feeders) to the mast,
inserts the half-ring into its groove, and fastens to it the
guy-ropes of the fourth level, helps Number Two with the hoist-
ing [of the mast?], ensures its vertical positioning by giving
appropriate orders to the Numbers standing at the guy-ropes, and
fastens the guy-ropes of the next levels to the mast;
Number Two hoists the mast upwards.
When attaching the next
section, he lowers the holder of the hoist and puts it under the
next section of the mast. He repeats these operations until the
/ mast
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
11110 SECRET
-89-
mast is lifted to the required height;
- Numbers. Three, Four, and Five hold the guy-ropes, watching the
mast and keeping it vertical, following Number One's inotructions.
Remarks
1) The guy-ropes of the third level are installed between the 7th
and 6th sections of the mast, and the guy-ropes of the 2nd
level - between the 5th and 4th sections.
When attaching the last section of the mast - the holder of the
hoist is placed under it, but the mast is not lifted.
3)
As a rule, the mast should be erected to the height of seven
metal mast sections* The mast is erected to the height of
eight metal sections only when there is an excessive noise
level in the telephone channels.
- Number Two releases slightly the braking mechanism of the hoist,
and turning the crank slowly, lowers the mast on to its base;
Then, together with Number Three, attaches the guy-ropes of the
2nd, 3rd, and 4th level guy-ropes to the pegs. He does the same
with Number Four;
- Number Three, together with Number Five, also attaches the 2nd
3rd, and 4th level guy-ropes to the pegs;
- Number One gives instructions necessary for aligning the mast in
the vertical position, and Numbers Three, Four and Five adjust
accordingly the tension of the appropriate guy-ropes;
- Numbers One and Four aim the aerial towards the correspondent
station, and then fasten the aerial guy-ropes to their respect-
ive pegs;
- Numbers Two, Three and Four collect the remaining equipment and
tools, and put them in their proper place;
- Number Five earths the station. The second mast can be erect-
ed in the same way, when required.
50X1-HUM
/ Dismantling of the aerial
50X1-HUN
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
ID SECRET
? 90 ?
Dismantling of the aerial and mast eqUEment
391_0 On the order of Number One: "Lower the aerial", the following
Operations are carried out:
- Numbers Three, Four and Five take up positions near the pegs,
loosen the guy-ropes, and hold the mast in the vertical
position;
- Number Two lifts the mast slightly, so that the lowest section
of the mast can be removed, takes off from this section the
holdel- of the hoist, and removes the lowest section of the mast.
He then crarks up the holder of the hoist, puts it on the next
section of the mast, releases the braking mechanism of the
hoist, and lowers the mast by turning the crank slowly* When
the lower end of the section is about 10 to 15 cm. from the
ground, he stops lowering the mast, and removes the next section
of the mast;
- Number One directs the lowering of the mast, and also helps
Number Two; as the mast is being lowered, he unhooks the guy-
ropes, removes the half-rings, and disconnects the aerial
feeders from the mast. The whole mast is lowered in the same
way..
392, After the mast has been lowered:
- Number Two holds the aerial hoist;
Numbers Three, Four and Five detach the guy-ropes from the pegs,
and straighten them;
- Number Five detaches the guy-ropes from the hoist, and holds
the hoist;
- Number Four rolls up the guy-ropes and packs them;
- Numbers Two and Three bring up the aerial cases, remove the
lower vertical dipoles, and put them inside the cover marked
with a white stripe;
- Number Five
4110SECRE7
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000115
50X1 -HUM
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
393.
!lb SECRET
-91-
50X1-HUM
- Number Five inclines the hoist and holds it in this position;
? NUbers Two and Three remove the aerial;
Number Five puts on the cover over the hoist, and attaches it
to the body of the truck;
- Number Three holds the aerial while it is being dismantled;
Number Two removes the dipoles, and places them in their respec-
tive covers;
Number One detaches the guy-ropes and disconnects the aerial
feeders from the aerial and from the equipment, screws on the
cups over the half-connectors of the aerial and feedees1 rolls
the feeders up and places them in the aerial case;
- Number Three, when the aerial is dismantled, places the aerial
boom in the aerial case;
- Number Two and Three place the case with the aerial into the case
under the body of the truck, and lock it;
Numbers Two and Three roll up the guy-ropt:s, pull out the pegs,
and place them in their respective covers;
Number Five places the mast sections in the chest, and disconn-
ects the earth connection from the truck;
- Number Four puts the parcel with the mast rigging into the right-
hand case inside the truck.
The second aerial mast equipment is dismantled in a similar way.
6. Switching on, Establishing Communication,
and Switching off the Station
Connection of a.c. mains
394. The a.c. mains are connected. to the station in the following
way:
?
1) Before connecting the a.c. mains it is necessary to:-
- check the mains voltage with the aid of the instrument TT-2.
41111111 SECRET
le mains
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
arSECRET
- 92 7
50X1 -HUM
- set the mains on-off switch (on the left-hand side of the mains
attachment) to the position "Wylaczone ["Off"];
set the "127/220 V" change-over switch (on the right-hand side
of the mains attachment) to the position corresponding to the
rated value of the mains voltage;
- turn anti-clockwise the mains voltage adjustment knob as far as
it will go;
- check whether the truck is earthed.
2) Plug in the mains cable N-4 half-connector into any half-connector
marked "127/220 V" on the left or right-hand side of the truck.
3) Connect the cable N-4 to the a.c. mains.
Remarks
1) When connecting the mains, the safety regulation must be
observed (see Appendix 1).
2) IT IS FORBIDDEN TO CONNECT THE STATION TO D.C. MAINS.
anutption of ttp_mymE_Eu021,12LE the equipment, -when the
station is connected to a.c. mains.
395. When the station is connected to a.c. mains, the switching on of
the power supplY should be carried out in the following way:
? the mains switch on the mains attachment should be set to the
positionlacz", ""On"J;
- turning clockwise the voltage aajustment kndb on the mains
attachment, adjust the voltage to 127 V, using the measuring
instrument [voltmeter] located between the racks (the white
lamp on the mains attachment, which shows the presence of the
mains voltage, should light up);
- the change-over switch "Praca- Dye' ["Operation Stand-by]
which is on the front panel of block i (see Figure 17) should
be set to the position "Dye, [Stand-by];
- the type of supply switch, which is located in the middle of
/ the front panel
4111110 SECRET
50X1
50X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
111111SECRET
-93-
the front panel of Block 1, should be switched from the position
"Wylacz" ftOff"] to the position "Siec" ["Naine"]. (the radio
receiver, and the telephone channels of the multiplexing unit
are now -switched on).
Switching onthe station battery power supply
396. Each half-set can-be supplied from any one of the three groups
of batteries belonging to it.
397. The battery supply should be switched on in the following way:
- the switch "Ladowanie Wylacz. - Rozladowanie" L"Charging - Off
Discharging"] of the selected battery group, which is located
on the charging panel of the respective half-set, should be
switched from the position 'Wylacz." ["off"] to the position
"Rozladowani ["Discharging"];
- the switch "Praca - Dyz."
["operation Stand-by"] which is
located on the front panel of Block 1, Should be set to the
position "Dyz.", ["Stand-by"];
? the type of supply switch, which is located on the front panel
of Block 1, should be switched from the position "Wylacz." ["offl
to the position "Akumulatory" ["Batteries"];
the voltmeter change-over switch located on the charging panel
of the half-set, should be set to the position corresponding to
the selected group of batteries.
7:temarks
1) It is forbidden to discharge the batteries below 11 Batteries
whose voltage has dropped to 11 V. should be switched on to the
charging position. Another group of batteries should be used
for supplying the station during this time.
2) The switching on of the transmitter power supply is described
under the heading "Establishing communication".
3) The switching on of the telegraph channel power supply is
described under the heading "Switching on of the _telegraph
111111PSECRET
50X1 -HUM
/ channels" 50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
111
1111 SECRET
? 94- ?
channels" (see Section 8 of this Chapter). [Page 109].
Setting of the 2at4 frequencies
398. The setting of the operating frequencies of the receiver and
transmitter takes place when the station is connected for "Stand-by"
operation.
399. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO ALTER THE TUNING OF THE TRANSMITMR DURING-
ITS 0.FLRATI0N.
400. The operating frequencies of the receiver and transmitter are
set in the following way:
- the switch "Swiatlo Wylatz." ["Light Off"], on the Block 1
front panel should be set to the position "Swiatlo" ["Light"]
(the dial lights of the receiver and the transmitter are then
lit up);
- unscrew to the left the receiver and transmitter dials locking
screws;
- rotate the knobs marked "Fala" ("Wave"' until the dial markings
[divisions] corresponding to the selected wave-length numbers
coincide with the vertical hairline pointers on the dial;
lock the receiver and transmitter dials by turning the locking
screws to the right;
- set the switch "Swiatlo Wylacz." to the position "Wylacz."
["Off"].
Establishing_samE1:22-11210.
401. Communication is established when the station is operating as
a terminal station. Communication should be established in the first
plate with the station serving the immediate superior.
402. Before establishing communication, the switches on the trans-
ceiver block and the multiplexing unit front panel should be set to the
following positions:
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
- the "Kant. - 4s0$40
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
-95-
50X1-HUM
- the "Konc. Retr." ["Terminal - Re-transmissiona] switch, to
the position "Konc." ["Terminer] (operation as a terminal
station);
the telephone channel switch "Tranz. Konc." ["Transit -
Terminal"] to the position "'conc." ["Terminain];
- the telegraph channels "ty'pe. of supply" switch, to position
"Wylacz." ("Off");
- the quartz calibrator switch, to position "Wylacz. ("Off91;
the AT;Cz [Automatic Frequency Control] switch, to position
"Wylacz." ("Offth
- the type of multiplexing switch, to position m:iewn. zwiel"
("Internal multiplexinel;
type of telephone channel operation suitches, to the position "2M
the telephone channel rocking keys, to the central position;
? the Block 2 instrument switch, to the position "TF";
the Block 1 testing instrument left-hand switch, to the position
"Ant." ("Aerial") (testing of the transmitter output power).
4030 For the purpose of establishing comEunication, the follow-
ing actions should be performed:
- set the operational frequencies, and switch on the power
supply of the equipment;
- set the switch "Fraca Dyt." ("Operation - Stand-by"), on the
front panel of Block. 1 to the position "Praca" ("Operation").
One should then hear the noise of the operating transmitter
converter, When the transmitter valves have warmed up (15 to
20 secs.) the pointer of the testing instrument should lie
within the marked sector of the instrument dial;
the "talking" key of the first telephone channel should be
set to the position "Kan. rad." ("Radio channel"] 0 In the
111111044ECRE7
50X1
absence of the ..,-
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
II lk SECRET
- 96 -
50X1 -HUM
absence of the carrier wave of the distant station Lcorrespondent
station], strong receiver noise should be audible in the earphones;
send the calling -signal to the distant station. For this
purpose, the calling signal key should be tilt d to the position
"Zee ["Calling signal"], and then returned to the central position;
call the correspondent by sending his and own identification call
signs. The presence of the carrier wave of the correspondent
station can be recognised by the disappearance of the receiver
noise,
404. When the correspondent station has anagered, the receiver auto-
matic frequency control should be switched on, and the testing and adjust-
ment of the telephone channel levels should begin;
- in the case when a calling signal comes from the correspondent
? station, the red pilot lamp lights up on the multiplexing unit
and the bell rings. Having received tha calling signal, it is
necessary to answer the correspondent. For this purpose the
"talking" key of the channel which received the calling signal
should be set to the position "Kan. rad." {"Radio charmer].
Duling the conversation, one should depress the telephone hand-
set pressel switch.
405. If correspondence is not established within 15 minutes after the
pre-arranged time, one should start testing own station equipment (see
sub-heading 7, item "Testing the station by self-contained operation").
406. Having tested the equipment by "self-contained operation"
method, one should again try to establish communication with the corres-
pondent station. If, after renewed trial, communication is not establish-
ed within 10 to 15 minutes, then it will be necessary to try to establish
communication through indirect links - over the wire lines, or other
available routes, while continuing the attempts to establish communication
by means of the radio-relay (one should periodically call the correspondent
SECRET
/ station
50X1 -HUM
....0
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
401 SECRET
50X1-HUM
-97-
station). When establishing communication, and during service calls only
the service calls panel should be used.
Ad'ustment of the tele hone channel levels
407. The adjustment of the telephone channel levels comprises the
following actions:
- the adjustment of the transmission level;
- the adjustment of the reception level.
? Adjustment of the transmission level
408. On the multiplexing unit, one should:
- set the change-over switch of the instrument to the position
"GP 12.
1 /
set the "on-off" switch of the instrument to the position "TF";
- set the calling signal key to the position "GP";
- by rotating the knob of the potentiometer of the measurement
[testing] generator "GP", set the measuring instrument pointer
to the Figure 50 (which is marked with a stroke);
- set the first telephone channel "talking" key to the position
"Kan. rad." ["Radio channeln] (the bell will then ring).
409. On the transceiver unit, one should:
- set the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument to the
position "Wej. nad." ["Transmitter input"];
- using the potentiometer "Ustawienie poziomu" ["Level adjustment"],
adjust the frequency deviation by means of the measuring instru-
ment, according to the [calibration ?] table supplied with each
transmitter.
Remarks
1) The transmitting level in the second telephone channel is also
set after the adjustment of the transmitter frequency deviation,
and after the adjustment of the receiving level in the first
telephone channel in the second station. The only difference is
that the measuring instrument switch is set to the position "GP2",
and the measurement [testing] generator signal level, which has
already been adjusted, is transmitted in the second channel. 50X1-HUM
11110SECRET
/2)
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1111 SECRET
-98-
50X1 -HUM
2) One should not adjust the transmitter frequency deviation accord-
ing to the transmitting level of the second telephone channel.
Adjustment of the receiving level
410* The receiving level should be adjusted in the following way:
- the Block 2 measuring instrument switch should be set to the
position "Ui";
- the "talking" key of the first telephone channel should be set
to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio charmer];
- turning the knob of the first telephone channel potentiometer
? "I", Cle pointer of the measuring instrument should be set to
the figure 50, which is marked with a stroke. (During the
reception of the testing [measurement] signal .from the corresp-
ondent stations the bell will ring);
41.10 The reception level in the second telephone channel is adjusted
in the same way, with the difference that the measuring instrument switch
should be in this case set to the position "U28$ while the level is adjust-
ed with the aid of the potentiometer "II".
Switchingoff the rt
412. When the station is supplied from the mains, the equipment
410 should be switched off in the following way:
the type of power supply switches in Blocks 1 and 2 are set to the
position "Wylacz." ["Off"];
- the mains attachment switch is set to position "Wylaoz." ["Off"];
- the voltage adjustment knob is turned anti-clockwise as far as
it will go;
the power supply cable is disconnected, first from the mains,
and then from the input terminals panel;
-
the power supply cable is rolled up and placed in the left-
hand case $ under the table with the equipment;
- ,the earth connection is disconnected from the truck.
/ Remark ?04141.
50X1 -HUM
-11110,SECR7
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
filiksmcm
?99?
Remark
50X1-HUM
When the equipment is being switched off temporarily, only the
first action is performed.
413e When the station is supplied from the batteries, the equipment
should be switched off in the following way:
- the power supply switches in Blocks 1 and 2 are set to the
position "Wylacz." L"Offnh
the charging panel switches are set to the position ?rylacz."
["off"];
- if the batteries weie being charged, the petrol-driven generator
unit is switched off;
- the power supply cable is disconnected from the petrol generator
unit and from the truck, and is then rolled up;
- the generator unit is covered with its metal housing, carried
into the truck, and placed under the table;
- the earth connection is disconnected from the truck.
Remark
When the equipment is being switched off temporarily, only the
first action is performed.
7. Checking the Readiness of the Equipment for Qperation
Checking the supply voltaga:1?
and the operating conditions
of the valves.
414. For this purpose it is necessary:
- to switch on the equipment;
- check the presence of all the voltages.
415. For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru-
ment should be set in turn to positions: 160 nad." ["4. 160 transmittert
"+ 120 1144, "'" 25 VII) IL' 45 "+ 160 odlaPP+ 160 receiver'].
416? When the voltages are normal, the measuring instrument pointer
should deflect to the marked sector of the instrument scale;
MCRET
check 0:*(a0
50X1-HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
-100-
50X1 -HUM
- check the operating conditions of the receiver valves.
/07, For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru
ment should be set to the position "Odb," PReceiver"3? and the right-
hand switch should be set in turn to all the positions marked with numbers
1 to 16, which are located on the smaller circle (these numbers correspond
to the numbers of the valves on the basic circuit diagram).
418. If the valves operate within the rated conditions, then in each
position of the switch, the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to
the marked secior of the instrument scale. In position 'V, the instru-
ment pointer will deflect only if the quartz calibrator is switched on:
- check the operating conditions of the transmitter valves.
419. For this purpose, the left-hand switch should be set to the
position ?Tad." PTransmitter"), and the right-hand switch should be set in
turn to all the positions from 1 to 6 (these numbers are located on the
external circumference of the circle).
420. If the valves operate within the rated conditions, then the
instrument pointer should deflect to the marked sector of the scale:
check the supply voltages and the operating conditions of the
valces in the telephcne portion of Block 2.
421. For this purpose, the measuring instrument switch "TF TatT
should be set to the position HTF", and the second switch should be set
successively to positions: "160", "12", "L-4", "Lt-3",
422. in each position of the switch, the measuring instrument
pointer should deflect to the marked section of the scale:
- check the supply voltages and the operating conditions of the
valves in the telegraph portion of Block 2.
423. For this purpose, the switch "TF - Ta" should be set to the
? position "TG", and the second switch of the measuring instrument should be
successively set to positions:
"IP Pt,"11-511, "11-6" "T.P
?2 r P
11111r SECRET
In each
50X1 -HUM
. neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
I
50X1 -HUM
In each position of the switch, the measuring instrument pointer should
deflect to the marked sector of the scale. In positions "LB", one
measures the voltage of the line circuit vibrator converters. The
particular telegraph channel should be at this time connected for operation
with the Baudot apparatus, ?
glallpg1112.1ranamitter power
4244 For this purpose it is necessary to:
load the transmitter output with a dumpy aerial;
set the left-hand measuring instrument switch to the position
"Ant," ["Aerial"];
switch on the transmitter. At rated voltages of the power
supply sources, the instrument pointer should deflect to the
marked sector of the scale. Should the transmitter power prove
to be too low, the resonant circuit at the output should be trimmed.
To gain access to the trimming capacitor it is neCessary to loosen
the screw marked "Obw. wyjsc." ["Output cilcuie] on the front
panel of Block 1. The output circuit can be trimmed when the
left7hand switch is in the position "Nad." ["Transmitter"], and
the right-hand switch is in position "1" (numbers on the external
circumference of the circle). The capacitor shaft should be
turned until the minimum deflection of the instrument pointer
is obtained (minimum anode current in the output valve). Having
done this, the power delivered to the dummy aerial by the trans-
mitter should be checked*
Testing the transmitter modulation
4254 In order to test the transmitter modulation, the left-hand
switch of the measuring instrument of Block 1 should be set to the position
"Wejscie nad." ["Transmitter input"], and the "talking" key of one of the
' telephone channels should be set to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio
channel"].
50X1 -HUM
ifr The calling signal
11111&SECRET
neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
J. SECRET
-102-
50X1 -HUM
426. The calling signal key should be set to the position "Zeve
["Calling signal"] or "GP". The measuring instrument pointer should then
deflect. The measuring instrument pointer should also deflect when one
blows into the microphone*
Testing the receiver operation
427. For this purpose it is necessary to:
set the "talking" key of the first or of the second telephone
channel to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio channel"];
check for the presence of noise in the earphones;
- check whether this noise disappears when the quartz calibrator
is switched on;
- check whether beats (varying pitch of the tone) are audible in
the first telephone channel, when the receiver is tuned to the
frequencies corresponding to the points marked on the scale.
Remark
The full capacity of the receiver for operation is tested by
the "self-containedeoperation method.
Checkin the accurac of calibration of the receiver
and correction of frequency.
428. Checking of the accuracy of calibration of the receiver and the
correction of frequency is carried out at the rated voltages of the prim-
ary current sources (12 V with the battery power supply, and 127 V with
the mains power supply), after the warming up of the receiver (the warming
up period should be not less than 1 hours with the transmitter switched
on)0 and using for this purpose the first telephone channel.
429. The receiver calibration should be checked with the aerial
feeder disconnected, and in the following way.
430. The receiver dial should be set exactly to the determined
calibration frequency, which is marked with a point on the dial.
431* The transmitter is then tuned to a frequency which differs
/ not
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
41.SECRET
50X1 -HUM
-103 -
not less than 5 operating wavelengths from the receiver frequency. The
receiver automatic frequency control unit is then switched on. In order
to obtain abetter audibility, the first telephone channel type of oper-
ation switch should be set to the position "4 TG". After having set the
telephone channels control [testing] key into position "I", the receiver
hum should be heard in the earphone of the telephone handset.
432. The quartz calibrator is then switched on. If the beat
frequency can be heard in the earphone of the handset connected into the
first telephoae channel, it means that the receiver detuning remains with-
in the admissible limits. In such a case, there is no need for frequency
correction.
435. If there is no beat frequency in the earphone of the handset,
it means that either the receiver is accurately calibrated, and the fre-
quency marked on the dial corresponds exactly to the frequency of the
receiver tuning, or that, On the contrary, the ieceiver is considerably
out of tune. It is possible to find out which is the case by turning the
knob marked "Pala" ["Wave"]. If on slight rotation of the knob marked
"Fala" to the right and to the left the beat frequency tone becomes audible$
and it begins on a law note, rising in pitch as the detuning increases,
this means that the receiver is calibrated exactly.
434. In such a case there is no need for frequency oorrection.
435. If, on the other hand, there is no beat frequency audible in
the earphone of the telephone andset, then the detuning should be
increased by turning the knob to the right and to the left until the beat
frequency becomes audible in the earphone. The presence of the beat
frequency at another point of the scale, beyond the point marking the
the calibration frequency, proves that the receiver is out of tune.
such a case it is necessary to proceed with the frequency correction,
436. For the purpose of frequency correction, the following
/ operations
411111W SECRET
50X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
- 104 -
operations should be performed:
- remove the leaden seal, and screw out the bolt marked HO
(receiver heterodyne oscillator);
- find out on which side of the calibration point the beat
frequency tone can be heard - whether on the side of the
higher, or of the lower, wavelengths numbers;
set the receiver dial exactly to the calibration frequency,
which is marked with a dot;
- turninF the shaft of the tuning capacitor, located on the
right-hand side of Block 19 obtain a zero beat at the output of
the first telephone channel. If the zero beat has-been prev-
iously obtained on the side of the lower wavelength numbers, th,)
capacitor shaft should be turned clockwise, and vice versa;
- check the accuracy of calibration at another calibration point.
The detuning of the receiver at this point should lie within
the admissible limits.
Remark
For frequency correction,use should be made of the special.
screw-driver, which is provided in the station equipment.
When the local heterodyne oscillator valve Ir.-50 and the
frequency tuning valve L-6 have been replaced, it is
essential to check the receiver calibration, and to perform
the frequency correction,
Checking.the calibration accuracy of the transmitter
and correction of the frequency.
437. The calibration accuracy of the transmitter is checked at the
rated voltages of the power supply sources, one hour after the equipment
has been switched on.
438. In order to check the calibration it is necessary to:
remove the leaden seal, and screw out the bolt marked ZG
(master oscillator);
- put the receiver and the transmitter on load with dummy aerials;
/- with the quartz
111111110SECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
-105-
50X1-HUM
with the quartz calibrator switched on, tune the receiver to
the calibration frequency, which is marked with a dot, in order
to obtain a zero beat;
- set the transmitter dial exactly to the frequency corresponding
to the frequency of the receiver* If the beat frequency tone
can be heard at the output of the first telephone channel (or
if there is a zero beat), it means that the detuning of the trans-
mitter is within admissible limits, and that there is no need for
the frequency correction a If,however? at the accurate setting of
the transmitter scale to the frequency corresponding to the receiv-
er frequency, there is no audible beat frequency, and the zero beat
appears only when the transmitter is tuned to a frequency differ-
ing from the correct frequency, this means that the transmitter
is out of tune, and that a frequency correction is necessary.
439. The frequency correction of the transmitter should be perform-
ed in the following way:
- set the transmitter tuning dial exactly to the appropriate cali-
bration frequency (according to the receiver frequency);
- though the aperture in the side wall of Block 1, turn the shaft
of the tuning capacitor, until a zero beat is obtained at the
output of the first telephone channel;
- check the accuracy of the transmitter calibration according to
the receiver in the second calibration channel.
440. At this pint, the detuning should be within the admissible Units.
Remark
Before checking the transmitter calibration, the receiver
should be set to zero beat at the point marking the calibration
frequency, If the zero beat cannot be Obtained by tuning the
receiver, the accuracy of the transmitter calibration should be
tested at one of the adjacent calibration frequencies. One
should first check the receiver calibration accuracy at the
nearest calibration point. The receiver scale should be set
very accurately to the given calibration frequency, as other-
wise the calibration error of the transmitter will be increased
50X1
/ by the error 50X1-HUM
11110101ECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
424.
by the error due to the inaccurate setting of the receiver
frequency.
- screw in the cap into the aperture ZG, and fix the leaden seal.
TestinF the operation of automatic frequency control.
The operation of the automatic frequency control should be
tested at the rated values of the sources of supply voltages, and at the
scale settings corresponding to the calibration frequencies.
442, The operation of the AFC should be rested in the following way:
- tune the receiver to the calibration frequency;
set the first telephone channel type of operation switch to
the position "4TG";
set the telephone ohannel testing key to the position "I";
- switch on the quartz calibrator;
set the left-hand switch of Block 1 to the positioa "Odb."
["Receiver"], and the right-hand switch to the position "Is-6"
according to the markings on the interior circumference of the
circle;
- turning slowly the knob "Fala" ["Wave"] tune the receiver for
zero beat in the earphone;
- switch on the AFC (set the switch "AECz" to the position qllacz."
POn"J). If after switching on the AFC the beat frequency
pitch in the earphone of the handset changes) this shows that
the'AFC is tuned correctly.
443. When the AFC is adjusted correctly, the current of valve 14-6
in the receiver should not change when the AFC is switched on and off.
W. If the current does change, the AFC should be re-adjusted.
Adjustment of the _AFC [Automatic frequenczcontrol]
when the station is owered from batteries.
445. For this purpose, it is necessary to:
- check the AFC operation;
.
- remove the leaden seal and screw out the cap marked "ArCzn,
/ - with the aid
4111101ECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
111111PSECRET
-107-
50X1-HUM
with the aid of the potentiometer R37 located on the left-
hand wall of the chassis of Block I (see Figure 20), adjust
the circuit so that when switching the AFC on and off, the
valve current does not change, and the beat frequency-tone
pitch at the output of the first telephone channel also
remains constant;
screw in the cap into the aperture marked "APCzn? and re-
fix the leaden seal.
Adjustment of the Am [Automatic fre uenc control]
when the station is Dowered from the mains.
)1)4. When the station is powered from the a.c. mains, the adjustment
of the AFC is performed in a similar manner as in the case of the battery
power supply, with the difference, however, that the circuit is now
adjusted with the aid of the potentiometer located on the front panel of
Block 3.
Remark
In order not to disturb the adjustment of the AFC when passing
from one kind of supply to the other, the circuit should be
adjusted first with the battery power supply, and then with the
power supply from the a.c. mains.
Checking the operation of the station by the method
of "self-containecroperation.
447. , The "self-contained'operation. consists of the co-operation of
the transmitter of one half-set with the receiver of the other half-set,
.or of the co-operation of the transmitter of a half-set with the receiver
of the same half-set.
448. Both in the first and in the second case, the half-sets should
be switched on for operation as in a terminal station.
449. As a rule, in self-contained operation, the transmitter of one
half-set is used with the receiver of the other half-set. In this
case the transmitter should be loaded with a dummy aerial, and the
receiver is connected to the aerial with the aerial feeder.
/ In order to 50X1-H UM
11111PIECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
? 108 ?
50X1 -HUM
4504 In order to perform the "self-contained" operation test, the
transmitter should be tuned to the receiver frequency (it can also be done
the other way round, by tuning the receiver to the operating transmitter
frequency). If after the transmitter and the receiver are tuned to the
same frequency, the noise in the telephone channels is considerably reduced
then in turn one should test the channels for conversation and calling
signal transmission. The testing methods have been described in the
appropriate sections of this manual. The correct transmission Of tele-
phone conversation, and of the calling signals proves the efficiency of the
equipment. Such tests should be performed withdifferent aerials connect-
ed to the receiver (the vertical and the horizontal aerial). The efficien-
cy of the aeri41 and the aerial feeder is determined by the degree of the amp
of the noise level in the telephone channels.
451.
If the "self-contained" operation test is performed with the
transmitter and receiver of the same half-set, the transmission of the tele-
phone conversation should not be tested when using the "talk-call" circuit
of Block 2. For this purpose of testing the efficiency of telephone
conversation and calling signal transmission through the telephone channels,
they should 'be switched into operation in the circuit "4TF", and the tele-
phone instrument TAI-43 should be connected to the terminals 3, 4 or 7, 8 of
the line terminals panel. Speech from the telephone instrument should be
heard in the handset earphone of the "talk-call" circuit of Block 2 (the
testing selector switch should be set to the position corresponding to the
channel being tested).
452. When the calling signal is sent from the telephone instrument,
the bell should ring.
453. All the defects found during the self-contained operation
test should be removed forthwith.
4111burisaania
/ 8. Use of
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1111P SECRET
? 109 ?
50X1-HUM
8. Use of the Equipment when Operating as a Terminal Station
454. The wire lines connected to the terminal station should be
marked with the numbers of the central exchange sockets to which they are
connectea? and with the appropriate code names.
455. As telegraph lines, one can use either separate wire lines,
or two-wire telephone lines of the first and the second telephone channels,
which in this case should be connected at both ends through the line trans-
formers. The connection of the line transformers to the wire lines is
made in the radiorelay station with the aid of switches located on the
line panel. For instance, in order to use the lines of the first tele-
phone channel for the operation of the first or the second telegraph
channel, the switch "iTF" on the line panel should be set to the position
ffiTGIt
or "2TG" respectively.
456. If separate wire lines are used for the telegraph operation,
the switches "iTF" and "2TF" on the line panel should be set to the posit-
ion mArylacz." L"Off"1.
457. The process of establishing communication, and of the adjustment
of levels in the telephone channels when the station operates as a termin-
al station, has been already described in the sub-heading 6 of this
chapter. We shall now examine the types of operation and the mainten-
ance of service communication when the station operates as a terminal
station.
Operation of the station when asing own multi lexing equipment
Use of the telephone channels
458. In order to prepare for use the telephone channels of the
station the following steps should be taken:
connect the wire lines of the first and the second telephone
? channels to the terminals "1 - 2" and "5 ? 6" respectively,
on the input terminal panel (outside the truck);
illbhSECRET
- check
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
- 110 -
50X1-HUM
check the transmission of speech and of the calling signals from
the station to the exchange and vice-versa, For this purpose
the "talking" key of the respective channel should be set to the
position "Centro" ["Exchange"];
- check the quality of transmission of speech and of the calling
signals through the radio-relay route from one terminal exchange
station to the other, and vice-versa. The "talking" keys should
in this case be set to the middle position. The transEission of the
calling signals through the radio-relay is indicated by the
pilot lamps. marked "Centro" ("Exchange) or "Kan. rad*" ["Radio
channel"], and by the bell. When the calling signal comes from
the exchange station, the green pilot lamp marked "Centr." lights
up. When the calling signal comes from the side of the radio
relay correspondent [distant] stationl the red pilot lamp marked
"Kano rad." lights up;
- the transmission of speech through the radio relay route can be
tested with the aid of the telephone handset, by setting the
testing key marked "Kontr." ["Test"] to the position I or II.
Switching on the telegraph channels.
459. The telegraph channels should be connected in the following
way:
0
- the telegraph channel type of power supply switch located on
Block 2 should be set to the position corresponding to the
particular type of power supply (mains or battery);
set the switch "Konc. Retr." ['germinal Re-transm.") to the
position "Konc." ["Terminal"];
- set the channel switch "Norm. Odwrotn." ["Normal Reverse"] to
the position "Norm.", both for the "ST-.35" and for "Baudot"
operation;
-04.10 SECRET
/ - set
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
411W SECRET
- 114 -
50X1-HUM
- set the type of operation key "Bodo Dupleks - ST-35 - Simpleks"
{"Baudot - Duplex - ST-35 - Simplex"] to the appropriate type of
operation.
460. In order to test the telegraph channels by the "self-contained"
operation method the following steps should be taken:
- set the measuring instrument switch to the position "TG";
- set the type of operation switch to the position "Baudot";
- set the measuring instrument selector switch to the position
9.1" ("12.2 -
- set the telegraph channel key to the position "Sprawd. 9.1"
(12.8) ["Check 9.1"]. In this case, the + 60 V voltage is
applied to the line winding of the transmitting relay, and the
ultra-sonic frequency generator output is connected to the in-
put of the telegraph signals receiver. The measuring instru-
ment pointer should deflect to the right and should remain in
the marked sector of the scale;
the testing key should be set to the position Sprawdz. 8.5"
(12.2). In this case to the line winding is applied the - 60 V
voltage. The measuring instrument pointer should deflect to
the left, and should remain in the marked sector of the scale;
- check the deviation of the transmitter for each telegraph channel.
For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru-
ment located on Block 1 should be set to the position "Wejsc.
nad." ("Transm. input"] and the Switch "Faca Sprawdz,"
["Operation -Testing"] located on Block 2 should be set to
the position "Pram" ["Operation"]. The measuring instrument
/ pointer
* Note Positions for the second telegraph channel
are given in brackets.
41111WSECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1'
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 -
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
41. SECRET
- 112 -
pointer on Block 1 should deflect and should indicate the same
number of scale divisions as is given in the table of deviations
(it should be remembered that the deviation of the telephone
channels has already been adjusted beforehand).
Adjustment of the telegraph channels
461. The radio relay station telegraph channels are adjusted by
means of the instrument included in the equipment of the station.
462. For this purpose, one should:
? at the terminal stations:
connect the terminal "Nad." ["Trans-
50X1 -HUM
mission"] of the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels
and relays, with the terminal "11" or "13"- of the line panel;
the terminal "Ob." ["Reception"] - with terminals "12" or "14",
as required;, the terminal "Z" - with the terminal "Ziemia"
["Earth"] of the line panel e The keys of the tel3graph channels
should be set: one in the position "Dodo" ["Baudot"], and the other
in the position "Praca" ["Operation"];
set the change-over switch "2 biegun. - 1 biegun" [presumably:
'Bi-directional Uni-directional"] on the instrument for adjust-
ing the telegraph channels and relays, to the position "2 biegun.";
- set the switch "Sprawn. Symetr. Bade kan." ["Efficiency -
Symmetry - Channel test"] to the position "Bad.. kan." ["Channel
test"];
set the switch Bad. kan. Sprawdzanie" ["Channel test -
Checking"] to the position "Sprawdzanie ["checking"], and the
switch "Normaln. Odwrotne" ["Normal - Reverse"] to the position
"NormaIn." [Normal"];
switch on the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels
and relays;
- turn the knob marked "Rownowazenie" ["Balancing"] until the .
40,SECRET
50X1
/ pointer
50X1 -HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
4. SECRET
-113-
50X1 -HUM
pointer oscillates about the zero mark. This shows that the
positive and the negative pulses are equal;
set the switch "Bad. kan. Spramdzanie" ["Channel test -
Checking"] to the position "Bad. kan." ["Channel test"]. The
properly adjusted telegraph pulses will then be sent to the
transmitting part of the telegraph channel, and the telegraph
pulses received from the other station will be applied through the
receiving part of the channel to the measuring circuit and the
instrument;
set the instrument switch located on Block 2 to the position
"LTi" ("LT2"). Then press the button "LT" on the instrument
for adjusting the telegraph channels and relays, and with the aid
of the potentiometer "Prad liniow." ("Line current"], located
on Block 2, adjust the current until the pointer indicates the
number 25;
with the aid of the potentiometer of the telegraph channel
being tested, located on Block 2 and marked "Rownowazenle" ["Balan-
cing"], adjust the telegraph channel, until the pointer of the
miliiammeter osal].ates about the zero mark.
Remarks
1) The Baudot instruments operate with bi-directional pulses, and
the ST-35 instruments operate with uni-directional pulses. As
mentioned above, the channel adjustment is performed simultan-
eously in both directions, both for the duplex operation of the
ST-35 instrument, and for the operation of the Baudot instru-
ments. The telegraph channel adjustment for the simplex
operation of the ST-35 instruments is performed also in the
Baudot circuit.
2) The basic data concerning the instrument for adjusting the
telegraph channels and relays are given in the section 8 of
this chapter.
Preparation of channels for o eration with
the telegraph instruments
463. For duplex operation with the Baudot or ST-35 instruments,
AelIllObSECRElr
/ the wire lines
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
- 114 -
the wire lines connecting the instruments with the telegraph channels
9hould be connected to the input terminals panel in the following way:
the lines intended for transmission in the first and the
second telegraph channels should be connected to the terminals,
"11" and "13" respectively;
the lines intended for reception in the first and the second
telegraph channels should be connected to the terminals "12"
and "14" respectively., For simplex operation of the instru-
ments ST-35, the lines of the first and the second channels
should be connected to the terminals "11" and "13" respectively.
Remarks
1) For operation with the ST-35 instruments, the line circuits
are fed with power from the side of the telegraph instruments.
For operation with the Baudot instruments, the receiving line
circuits are fed with power fromthe side of the radio-relay
station, and the transmitting line circuits are fed from the
line side.
2) When operating the ST-35 instruments, one can earth the negative
or the positive terminal of the battery, on the Baudot instru-
ment side.
3) If the positive terminal of the battery is earthed - the switch
"NormaIn. Odwrotn." ["Normal - Reverse"] should be set to the
position "Odwrotn." L"Reverse").
464. The key "Spray/dz. L"Check - Operation") should be
set to the position "Fraca" POperation"].
50X1-HUM
465. Adjust the valves of the line currents. For this purpose,
the multiplexing unit. measuring instrument switch should be set to the
position "TG", and the step-by-step switch of the instrument to the
position "LT1" or "LT2" (the line current of the appropriate channel).
466. At the radio-relay station, in all the cases, only the line
input currents energising the telegraph transmitting relays are adjusted.
The rated value of the line current can be obtained with the aid of
potentiometers marked "Frad liniowy" ["Line current").
467. For the operation of the ST-35 instruments, the line current
should be adjusted in such away that the meter pointEr indices the division
41110SECRET
50X1
50X1-HUM
/ marked 0....
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
11111FSECRET
- 115 -
50X1 -HUM
marked 50; this corresponds to a line current of 50 mk. During operat-
ion of the Baudot instruments, the line current should be adjusted until
the pointer indicates 25; ' this corresponds to a line current of 25 na.
468. Communicate with the telegraph exchange in order to check wheth-
er the telegraph instrument operation through the radio-relay link is
correct.
4690
ready for use.
Operation of the station with external multiplexing
470. When the station operates with external multiplexing, the
second telephone channel and both the telegraph channels are disconnected.
On the other hand, the first telephone channel works normally, and can be
used both for operational communication, as for service communication.
471. For operation with the external multiplexing equipment, the
following steps should be taken:
- establish communication, and adjust the
telephone channel;
- connect the transmitting path wire line
On completion of the above steps, the telegraph channels will be
levels in
the first
of the external multi-
plexing unit to the terminals "15 -16" located on the input term-
inals panel, and the receiving path wire line to the terminals
"17 - 18";
set the left-hand switch of Block 1 measrring instrument
to the position "Wejsc. flax'," ["Transm. input"];
- set the type of operation switch on Block 2 to the position
"Zewn. zwielokrotn." L"External multiplexing"];
- adjust the transmitting level in the external multiplexing
channel (the level adjustment is described later in this
manual).
40 SECRET
/ Earthing
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
TIT SECRET
'V
Earthing of the Station
50X1-HUM
472. In order.to ensure the correct operation of the telegraph
channels, one should carefully earth the station.
473. To earth the station, proceed as follows:
Eig two holes about 30 to 50 ems, deeps and at a distance of
15 to 20 in, from one another;
drive earthing pegs into the holes, and connect these pegs by
special leads. to the terminals "Ziemia" ["Earth"] on the input
terminal panel,
474. The holes should be dug in low-lying sites, in damp ditches, in
the vicinity of streams, etc.* When the ground has low conductivity (sand,
stony surface, rocks?) one should bring an additional lead from the
communication centre to serve as a return connection for the telegraph
channels*
Checking the state of the connecting
lines and the quality of the ealltLag
475. The state of the connecting lines and the quality of the earth-
ing is checked from the communication centre; the measurement should be
applied to "the insulation" and "the earth" of the line being tested*
476. For the purpose of testing the insulation of any lead, it
should be disconnected from the input terminal panel.
477. For the purpose of testing the insulation of a circuit through
its mid-point, the switch "4TF" or "2TF" (according to the line being
tested) must be set to the position "Wylacz." 1i!0ff"1.
478. In order to measure the "earth" of any circuit, the terminal of
the appropriate lead on the lines panel should be connected With the term-
inal "Ziemia" [flEarW].
479. In order to measure "the earth" through the "mid-point of the
4110 circuit", the terminals "41." or "13" on the line panel should be connected
to the terminals "Ziemia ["Earth"]s and the switch "ITF" (or "2TF"),
4111101ECRET
should te set "50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
11111111FSECRET
-117-
50X1-HUM
should be set as required to the position "lIG" or "2TG"*
Adjustment of the level during external multiplexing.
by means of triple carrier telephony equipment
480. Far this purpose, one should:
- set the key "Sprawdzanie Fraca" ["Checking Operation"] to
the position "Fraca" ["operation"];
- switch on the first telegraph channel power supply, and after
the valves have warmed up (15 to 20 seconds) take a reading of
the Block 1. measuring instrument;
switch off the telegraph channel power supply;
set the type of operation switch on Block 2 to the position
"Zewn. zwielokrotr. konc." L"External multiplexing, terminalth
- send. testing signals of a normal measuring level from the first
channel of the triple carrier telephony equipment;
by turning the shaft of the potentiometer marked "Zewn. zwielok-
rotn." ["External multiplexing"] located on Block 2, set on the
instrument of Block 1 the same value of readings as at point 2*
481, On completion of all the above steps the external multiplexing
channel will be ready for operation*
Adjustment of the level during external multiplexing
by means of the sinEls_carrier telephony equipment
482* For this purpose, one should:
send from the second telephone channel of the station a signal
at the normal transmission level, and take the measuring instru-
ment reading on Block 1;
set the type of operation switch of Block 2 to position "Zewn.
zwielokrotn. konc." ["External multiplexing, terminal"];
- send a calling signal from the carrier channel of the single
carrier telephony equipment;
- turn the shaft of the potentiometer marked "Rtr." PRe-transmissionft]
located on Block 2, set the same level as that of the second
4111P1ECRET telephone
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
IlerSECRET
- 118 -
50X1 -HUM
telephone channel of the station (see above).
4830 On completion of all the above steps) the external multiplexing
channel will be ready for operation.
Secondary multiplexing of the telephone channels
'484. By means of the multiple telegraphy equipment, multiplexing with
three or six telegraph channels can be applied to each of the station
telephone channels.*
485. The multiple telegraphy equipment should be connected to the
four-wire circuit of the station telephone channel in the following way:,
- in the case of multiplexing the first telephone channel) the
transmitting direction line of the multiple telegraphy equipment
should be connected at the input terminal panel to the terminals
it3-4", and the receiving direction line to the terminals "1- 2".
In the case of the multiplexing of the second telephone channel--
the transmitting direction line should be connected at the input
terminal panel to the terminals "7 - 8", and the receiving'
direction line - to the terminals m5 - 6"1,
the type of operation switch of the telephone channel to which
the multiplexing is applied, should be set to the position N.I.TG".
486. The remaining channels are connected for operation in the
manner described under the heading "Operation of the station when using
own multiplexing equipment.
Transit [Re-transmission] operation of the telephone channels
487. The multiplexing unit of the radio relay station makes it
possible to connect the telephone channels for transit operation [re-trans-
mission] in a two-wire or in a four-wire, circuit. The transit operation
is used when the station channels are connected directly with one another,
or with the channels of a mai-channel station of the same type, or with
the wire channels of a carrier telephony system.
/ 488.
4.111rSECRET ""6
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
ar SECRET
- 119 -
50X1-HUM
4880 The multi-channel stations and the sextuple carrier telephony
systems permit transit connections with the telephone channels of the
station in a two-wire circuit only.
489. The transit connection of the channels with a single carrier
telephony system is possible both in a two-wire, and in a four-wire circuit.
490.
In order to connect the telephone channels for transit oper-
ation in a two-wire circuit, the following steps are necessary:
- set the type of operation switch of the appropriate telephone
channel to the position. "2TF";
- set the "Kono. - Retro" ["Terminal Re-transmission"] switch to
the position "Kono." ["Teiminal"];
set the "Trans. - Kona." ["Transit Termina]."] switch to the
position "Trans." ["Transit"1;
- connect the wire connection lines assigned to the first telephone
channel to the terminals "1 - 2", and those assigned to the
second telephone channel to the terminals "5 ? 6" (on the input
terminal panel).
491. In order to connect the telephone channels for transit operat-
ion in a four-wire circuit the following steps are necessary:
- set the type of operation switch to the position "4TF";
- set the "Retr. - Komi" ["Re-transmission Terminal"]
switch to the position "Kono." ["Terminal"];
connect the first telephone channel wire lines of the trans-
mitting direction to the terminals "3 ? /00 and of the
receiving direction to the terminals "1 - 2". The wire
lines of the second telephone channel should be connected to the
terminals "7 - 8" and "5 ? 6", respectively.
Service communication
492. Before using a telephone channel for service comrunication,
1.11PIECRET,
50X1-HUM
/ the testing key
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
0111111r SECRET
- 120 -
50X1-HUM
the testing key should be tilted into position I or II in order to check
whether the particular channel is not being used for an operational con-
versation.
493. For the purpose of carrying out a service conversation, the
"talking" key of the unoccupied channel should be tilted to the position
"Kan, rad," ["Radio charmer} or "Centro" ["Exchange"]. The calling
signal should then be sent,
494. Calling of the distant radio relay station is done by sending
4111 a pre-determined number of calling signals. After sending the calling
signals, the desired station should be called by sending its call-sign,
and the call-sign of ones awn station.
495. In order to answer the calling signal from a terminal station,
the "talking" key of the calling channel should be tilted to the position
"Kan, rad." or "Centro" [Radio channel" 0 or Exchange] according to where
the signal came from,
496. When the conversation is finished, the "talking"keys of the
telephone channels should be set to the mid-positions.
497. Service conversations can be carried out onl in exce tional
cases, after obtaining permission from the main [head] station, For
service communication between the terminal station and the elements of the
communication system there exists as a rule a separate line which is
connected to the terminals "9 ? 10" on the input terminal panel. To the
terminals "9 - 10" on the line panel is connected the telephone instru-
ment TAI-43, which is included in the station equipment.
498. , It should be borne in mind that by making a service call along
any section of the radio relay route, the communication between the tele-
phone exchanges is interrupted. If the station receives a calling sign-
al when a service conversation is in progress, then a green pilot lamp
marked "Centr." ["Exchange] lights up on Block 2 and the bel2 rings.
/ 499. ow.
%OP SECRET
50X1-HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
40 SECRET
- 121 -
50X1-HUM
499. In such a case the channel should be quickly cleared, and turn-
ed over to operational communication. At the same time efforts should be
made to secure a good passage of the operational conversations.
500. During external multiplexing, the service calls can be carried
out only through the first telephone channel, in the same way as described
above.
501. During secondary multiplexing, the service calls are carried
out only through the channel which is not multiplexed.
502. During two-wire circuit transit, service calls in both direct-
ions are carried out in the same way as when the station is operating with
own multiplexing equipment,
503. During four-wire circuit transit operation of the telephone
channel, service communication with the radio-relay of the correspondent
station is maintained in the following way:
in order to answer a calling signal, the type of operation switch
of the appropriate channel should be set to the position "2TF",
and the rocking key "Kan. rad, - Centr." L"Radio channel - .
Exchange"' to the position "Kan. rad." {"Radio channel"'. If
only one channel is used for transit, then the service calls should
be carried out in the other channel, in the way described above.
504. When the station is temporarily switched off, and the connect-
inganes with the communications centre are not removed, then in order to -
retain the possibility of receiving a calling signal from the exchange, the
power supply should not be switched off on the terminal station charging
panel.
9. Use of the Eaui ment Ehal21.12,2ming
as an InteiIte
Preliminary steps, and establishing of communication
505. In an intermediate station, both half-sets operate on re-trans-
/ mission ..... 50X1-HUM
SECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
41111r SECRET
- 122 -
mission. To prepare the station for the re-transmitting operation one
should:.
- connect both half-sets, and establish communication with the
correspondent stations in both directions. 'CommunicatiOn with
the correspondent stations is established in the same way as when
the station operates as a terminal station. The method of
establishing the communication has been described under sub-
heading 6 of this chapter;
- adjust the station channels, The method of the channel adjust-
ment has already been described;
- notify the correspondent stations of the readiness of the
station to go over to re-transmitting operation.
Re-transmission when the station operates
with awn multiplexing equipment
506. When at an intermediate station both half-sets operate as at
a terminal station, then in order to go over to re-transmission, in the case
of the operation with awn multiplexing equipment, the switches of the tele-
phone %and telegraph channels should be set to the position "..Retr." ["Re-
transmission"].
Remark
During re-transmission0.the telegraph channel power supply is
not switched on. The type of operation switches of the tele-
phone channels should be set to the position "2TF".
507. Having done this the terminal stations establish mutual communi-
cation through the intermediate stations, and, if necessary, adjust the
levels.
508. The levels are adjusted in the following way: the terminal
station sends a signal at the rated measurement [testing] level through the
first telephone channel. This signal is received at the intelmediate
station, for instance by the receiver of the half-set "A"1 and then through
the cable "SZ-2" is applied to the transmitter input of the half-set
/ On Block 1 6.00,
iliWSECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
. Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
AV SECRET
- 123 -
50X1 -HUM
On Block 1 of the half-set "B", the left-hand switch of the measuring
instrument should be set to the position "Ilbjsc.nad." ['Transmitter input"].
If the level of the received signal ensures the normal frequency deviation
of the transmitter of half-set "B", then the measuring instrument pointer
should deflect to the value given in the transmitter frequency deviation
adjustment table. If the level is too low, then with the aid of the
potentiometer of half-set "B" of Block 1, marked "Regulacja poziomu"
["Level adjustment"] the instrument pointer deflection should be adjusted
4110 to the value given in the table. This will correspond to the normal
deviation of the transmitter frequency.
509. Having completed the level adjustment at the first inter-
mediate station, the levels of the next intermediate stations should be
adjusted in the same way. The level of the terminal station should be
adjusted in the way described In sub-heading 6 of this chapter. The levels
in the opposite direction are adjusted in a similar way.
Re-transmission when the station o eratea
with external multipl,.3xing
510. When the terminal stations operate with external multiplexing
411/ equipment, then in order to obtain the re-transmission at the intermediate
station, the following steps should be taken:,
- the type of operation switches of own multiplexing equipment
of both half-sets should be set to the position "Zewn. zwielok-
rotn. retr." ["External multiplexing, re-transmission"];
- the first telephone channel switches should be set to the
position "Retr." [tPe-transmission"];
- the first telephone channel type of operation switches should
be set to the position "2TF";
Remark
The second telephone channels and the telegraph channels of the
/ station 50X1 -HUM
ii: SECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
- 124. -
50X1 -HUM
station multiplexing equipment do not operate.
Testing and service communications
511. During operation with own multiplexing equipment of the station,
the passing of the calling .signals along the radio relay channels is
indicated at the intemediate station by the ringing of a bell, and by the
signal [pilot] lamps marked "Kane rad." ("Radio channel") of the particular
channel on the half-set from the side of which the calling signal arrived.
512. On receipt of the pre-arranged call-sign, indicating the call-
ing (of awn station by the correspondent), one should switch oneself in for
listening by means of the telephone channel testing key of the channel
which received the calling signal. After hearing one's own call-sign, the
"talking". key of the channel concerned should be switched to the position
"Kan. rad." ("Radio channel"), and the switch "Konc."- Retre." ("Terminal -
Re-transmission") to the position "Konc." ("Terminarle The calling
station should then be answered.
513. When the conversation is finished, the switch -"Ebnce - Retro"
L"Terminal Re-transmission"1 should be set to the position "Retre"? and
the "talking" key to the mid-position.
512+. The telephone exchange or any radio relay station can be call-
ed from the intermediate station in exactly the same manner. Before ?
using a channel for the service call, it is necessary to check which of the
channels leading in the desired direction is free, by switching in for
listering by means of the testing key. If one of the channels is free,
the "talking" key of this channel should be set to the position "Kan. rade"
("Radio channel"), and the "Konc. Retr." switch - into position "Konc."
("TerMinal"). Next, tilting into the appropriate position the key "(IP -
ZEW", one sends the calling signal- calling the desired station or exchange.
After the conversation is completed, the key "Kan. rad. - Centre" ("Radio
/ channel Exchange....
OP' SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
4111111rSECRET
-125-
50X1 -HUM
channel - Exchange"] should be set to the midrposition? and the switch
"Konc. Retr." ["Terminal Re-transmission"1 to the position "Retr."
["Re-transmission"],
515. Should a calling signal from another direction arrive during a
service conversation, then the bell will ring, and on the other half-set the
pilot lamp marked "Kan, rad." ['Radio channe1"1 will light up. In such a
case the service conversation should be stopped at once, and the channel
should be cleared.
516. Thc transmission of conversations can be tested at the inter-
mediate station by switching the testing key "I - II" to the appropriate
position. From one half-set, one can check the transmission of the con-
versation in one direction only. Testing of the transmission in the other
direction can be done in a similar way from the other half-set.
517. In the case of re-transmission with external multiplexing, the
service calls can be carried out from the intermediate station through the
first telephone channel. The testing of the operation, and the making of
service calls, is done in this case in the same way as during re-trans-
mission with min multiplexing.
Extraction of channels from an intermediate station
(Operation AS a main repeater station)
518* It is possible to extract telephone and telegraph channel from
an intermediate station in two-wire and four-wire circuits. The extract-
ion of the channels from an intermediate station is only possible when the
own multiplexing equipment is being used. In order to extract a channel
from an intermediate station the switches "Konc. - Retr." ["Terminal -
Re-transmission"] of the appropriate channel in both half-sets should be
set to the position "Keno." [tTerminal"].
4111 519. The principles of maintenance of communication through the
extracted channels are the same as in the case of the terminal station.
50X1 -HUM
10. Operation using
1111106 SECRET
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
1111111VECRET
?126-
106 Qperation ushe Portable Equipment
50X1 -HUM
520. The portable equipment serves for operation away from the truck.
In many cases it may necessary to place the station in shelters, in
buildings, on the hills, etc., where it is not possible to bring up the
truck. The design of the station makes possible the speedy removal of the
equipment from the truck, and establishing communication from another site.
List of corn onents of the portable equipment
521. The portable equipment is composed of the following items:
- Block fi 1
- Block 2 1
Line panel
- Connecting cables (SZ-1 SZ-2, SZ-5, SZ-12)
set
- Telephone handset 1
- 5NKN-11.5 batteries 2
- Box with aerial and aerial feeders 1
- Package with the mast sections
- Mast hoist with the wooden mast section
- Packing with the mast rigging
1
1
1
522. The cable SZ-2 is required only in the case when the inter-
mediate station is deployed outside the truck and both half-sets are remov-
ed from the truck. When it is not necessary to erect the aerial to its
full height, the nuMber of the mast sections for the portable equipment can
be reeuced.
Removing the equipment from the truck
523. In order to prepare the portable equipment for removal from
the truck) the following steps are necessary:
- disconnect the connecting cables from the blocks on the rack
? and the line panel. Only one half-connector SZ-1-3 should be
disconnected from Block 3;
- remove the line panel from its holders;
4110. SECRET
50X1 -HUM
- disconnect..
I I
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
ai'SECRET
- 127 -
- disconnect the telephone handset from Block 2;
? remove Blocks 1 and 2 from the rack;
- place the line panel and Blocks 1 and 2 inside the knapsacks.
In the line panel knapsack place also the connecting cables and
the telephone handset;
- remove from underneath the truck the case with the aerial;
- remove the mast hoist from the truck;
- place in the packing the required number of mast sections;
- remove from the case the two 5NKN-45 batteries, and attach
to them the carrying belts.
524. When carrying the portable equipment to the deployment site,
the various elements should be protected against knocks and must not be
thrown about.
Zazzing_LthLloorlallisuingisaLfIrc_222:21ion,
-?22.2212L?222LEM-2L11.1...22.2.Elt1211
.525. At the deployment site of the portable equipment one should:
- prepare the deployment site, and take steps necessary for con-
cealing the equipment and its personnel;
- erect the masts with the aerials, taking into account the local
topographical conditions;
- remove the line panel and Blocks 1 and 2 from knapsacks;
- Place Block 1 on Block 2;
-,connect the cables to the line panel and to Blocks. 1 and 2;
- lengthen the cable SZ-1 with the aid of the cable SZ -12;
- connect cable SZ.-12 to the batteries;
- connect the aerial feeders to the receiver and the transmitter;
- connect the wire lines to their appropriate terminals on the
line panel;
connect the telephone handset to Block 2;
- switch on the equipment, set the operating wave-lengths,
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
/ establish the communication
4111111PSECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
SECRET
- 128 -
50X1 -HUM
establish the communication, and adjust the channels of the
station.
526* When setting up the intermediate station outside the truck,
both half-sets should be placed side by side, The multiplexing blocks
of both half-sets should be inter-connected by means of the cable SZ-2
(Figure 84).
527. A peculiarity of the portable equipment is the fact that in
most cases it will be' powered from batteries only. Therefore, if the
operation from outside the truck is expected to last for some time, it will
be necessary to arrange for the batteries to be charged.
528. On finishing work, the equipment is brought back to the truck
and replaced in its usual position. When installing the equipment inside
the truck, special attention must be paid to securing it firmly in position.
11. Battery ChargihF
5290 When servicing and using the batteries and the petrol-driven
generator assemblies, one should adhere to the following instructions con-
tained in the station:
- "Servicing manual for cadmium-nickel batteries";
- "Servicing, use, and adjustment manual for the engine 2 SD";
- "Form for the generator type GSK-1500"0
530. The station battery charging should be performed in the
following way:
- remowthe generator assembly from the truck, place it at a
? distance of about 15 to 20 meters from the truck, and prepare
for operation;
- connect the cable N-3 with the half-connector "12 - 27 V",
located on the input terminal panel;
- open the lids of the battery boxes and unscrew the vent plugs;
4111111,PSECRET
- before charging
,.50X1-HUM
nRcIassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 12V -
- before charging the batteries, the level of the electrolyte
should be checked, and if necessary, topped up;
- start the generator engine;
- the switch "AGR" ["Mobile Generator'] on the charging panel, to
which the generator set is connected, should be set to the
position Macz." ["0n"];
- set the voltmeter switch on the charging panel to the position
- adjust the generator voltage by means of the'field rheostat
knob. This voltage should. be 18 to 20 V;
- set the switches of the battery group to be charged to the
pusiaon qadowanie" L"Charging"-). With one generator assembly,
not more than two battery groups can be charged at the same time.
When it is necessary to charge more than two groups, another
generator assembly should be used;
adjust the charging 'current of each group to 1.25 A [th, The
normal charging should last about 7 hours. When necessary, an
accelerated charging rate is admissible. This is performed In
the following way: 2.5 hours at a double rate, followed by 2
50X1-HUM
hours charging at the normal charging current.
531. After 10 to 12 charging cycles, or when the station is not
used regularly, an intensified charging should be performed once a month.
The irtensified charging is performed in the following way: during 6
hours the batteries are charged at the normal charging current, and during
the next 6 hours - at a current equal to one half of the normal charging
current;
if during the battery charging the electrolyte has been
spilled, it should be removed from the battery with the aid
of the rubber bulb syringe;
41111110SECRET
- during
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECQET
I
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
- 130 -
- during battery charging it is forbidden to approach the
batteries with a naked flame.
532. When the batteries are being charged simultaneously by two
generator assemblies ,.the cable SZ-il should be disconnected from one of
the charging panels.
533. Battery charging by means of the generator assemblies should
be performed according to the above instructions.
534. After the charging is completed, the following steps should
be taken:
- set the switch on the charging panel to the position "Wylacz."
L"Off'];
- stop the engine and close the petrol tank cock;
- disconnect cable N-3, roll it up, and place it on the mobile
generator;
- cover the generator assembly, and place it inside the truck.
50X1-HUM
12. Instrument for the Ad:iustment of the Telegraph
Channels and Relays
535. This instrument serves for the adjustment of the station tele-
graph Channels, both for uni-directional and for bi-directional pulse
operation. It also makes it possible to estimate the degree of the tele-
graph signal distortion in a channel, and to check the efficiency and
symmetry of the telegraph relays.
536. The instrument is powered from a 12 V d.c. source. Its line
circuits are supplied from a vibrator converter installed inside the
instrument. The description, the circuit diagrams, and the principle of
operation of the instrument for the adjustment of the telegraph channels
and relays are given in the factory manual for the instrument, which is
included in the station equipment. The external view of the instrument
is shown in Figures 85, 86 and 87.
1111110"SECRET
SwitchiM, ? ??? ?50X1 -H U M
nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 -
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
41110SECRET
- 131 -
50X1 -HUM
grEikhing on the instrument
537. The supply voltage for the instrument is taken from the battery
charging panel. The socket with the voltage for the instrument is
located on the left-hand side of the charging panel* When connecting the
instrument it is necessary to pay attention to the polarity (4, -). The
instrument power supply is switched on with the switch located on the front
panel of the instrument. This switch should be set to the position
"Wlacz." ["On"].
538* When the voltage is switched on, the yellow pilot lamp lights
up and the vibrator converter) and the pulse generator relay begin to
operate. The pulse frequency (the telegraphic speed) of the generator is
50 bauds*
The testing and agjustment of the
telepaph relay
539. Before starting the relay symmetry test, the pulse generator
should be adjusted to give equal length of the positive and the negative
pulses*
540. When adjusting the pulse generator for bi-directional operation,
? the sequence of operations is as follows:
set the switch "1 Meg. - 2 Meg." ["Uni-directional - Bi-direct-
ion-11"] to the position "2 bie." L"Bi-directionalth
set the switch "Sprawa. - Symetr, - Bad. ken." ["Efficiency -
Symmetry - Channel testing"] to the position "Bad. ken,"
["channel testing"];
set the switch "Bad, ken. - SpraWdzanie" ["Channel testing -
Checking".] to the position "Sprawdzanie" L"Checking"];
switch on the power supply. When the power is switched on, ,
4111 the pulse generator starts to operate. If the instrument
pointer does not oscillate about the zero mark, it means
/ that the length
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
nRclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
416 SECRET
- 132 -
that the length of the positive and negative pulses is not equal;
- adjust the pulses for equal length.
541. In order to obtain equal length of pulses, the knob of the
potentiometer marked "Przewazanie" ["Out of balance"] should be turned
until the pointer oscillates about the zero mark.
542. The telegraph relay is checked for symmetry in the following
ways
50X1-HUM
a) the relay to be tested should be inserted into the socket
marked "Bad. przekazn." ["Relay testirgq.
b) set the switch "Sprawn. - Symetr. - Bad. kan.' ["Efficiency -
Symmetry Channel testing"] to the position "Symetr." ["Symmetry"].
543. If the relay is correctly adjusted for symmetry, the instrument
pointer will oscillate about the zero mark. If the relay is incorrectly
adjusted, the pointer will oscillate about the scale division which
indicates the percentage distortion of the telegraph signals by this
particular relay.
Measurement of relay efficiency
4111 544. After having tested the relay for symmetry, the switch "Sprawn.
- Symetre - Dad. kan." ["Efficiency - Symmetry - Channel testing"] should
be set to the position "Sprawn." ["Efficiency"] for the relay efficiency
test. The efficiency of a relay, given as a percentage, is found from
the expression : IC= 100 - where A is the number of divisions
indical;ed by the oscillating pointer of the instrument.
/ 13.
?
di. SECRET
Possible
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
lb SECRET
- 133 -
13. Possible Faults and Methods of their Elimination
50X1-HUM
?
Nature of fault
..
Method Of
elimination
1
I
When checking the receiver
1 or the transmitter valve
operating conditions (see
sub-heading 7) the Block 1
instrument pointer does not
deflect,
The particular valve
of the receiver of
of the transmitter
is defective,
Replace the
valve. (The
valve numbers
are engraved
I on the chassi
near each
valve).
When checking the multi-
plexing block valve ()per-.
ating conditions, the Block
2 instrument pointer does "
not deflect,
j The particular valve
of the telephone or
telegraph channel is
defective. Break
in the circuit.
Replace the
valve.
Check the
circuit.
The telephone or tele-
graph signals from the
station channels do not
enter the line.
Blown line panel
fuse of the wire
line concerned.
Replace the I
fuse.
I
1
When the calling signal
is coning from the
direction of the radio-
relay or of the tele-
phone exchange, the bell
rings, but the pilot lamp
does not light up.
Burnt-out bulb of the
1.pilot lamp of this
channel and direction:i
Break in the pilot
lamp circuit,
Replace the
bulb.
Check the
circuit.
The radio-relay station
does not receive the call-
ing signal the (bell does
not ring and the pilot
lamp does not light up).
Defective calling Rep ace the
signal receiver relay relay.
RP-15 of the partic-
ular channel. Break Check the
in the "OZA" circuit. circuit.
The telegraph signals do
not pass either in the
direction of the radio-
relay, or in the direction
of the wire line*
Defective transmitt-
ing or receiving
relay type REL4 of the
telegraph channel.
Blown fuse in the line
panel circuit concerned1
Replace the
relay.
Replace the
fuse.
0 7
50X1-HUM
9684 50X1-HUM
L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
11110smcuir
50X1-HUM
? 134- ?
No
Nature of fault
Cause
Method of
elimination
Crackling noises in ear-
phones, speech intermit-
tently disrupted.
,
Defective contacts in
the handset earphone,
Break in the handset
cord.
Correct the
contacts in
the earphone.
Replace the
cord.
No modulation of the trans-
mitter by the micro-tele-
phone,
Defective handset
microphone. One of
the modulation ampli-
fier valves faulty.
No current in the
handset
Replace the
microphone.
Replace the
valve.
Check the
handset
current supply
circuit.
No power or too low power
at the transmitter output.
Defective valve 4,-FIL
(L-1,),
Replace the
valve.
10
In one of the telephone
channels speech does not
pass towards the radio-
relay.
Defective contact in
the switch an. rad.
- Centr."
Bend the
appropriate
springs in
the switch.
11
No receiver hum and no con-
respondent station signals
in one of the telephone
channels. 1
I
1
Defective contact in
the switch "Kan. rad.
- Centr.". Break in
the potentiometer for
the receiving level
adjustment. Defect-
ive valve in Block 2
WMCz, [Low frequency
amplifier].
Re-bend res-
spective
springs in
the switch.
I Replace the
1 the potentio-
meter.
Replace the
valve.
12
I
?
The pilot lamp on the 1
charging panel lights up
when a group of batteries 1
is connected for charging*
Blown fuse in the
charging circuit of
the battery group
concerned.
* Replace
the fuse.
13
No + 160 V anode voltage
the transmitter.
in
Blown left-hand fuse
in Block I. Same
in Block 3.
* Replace
the fuse.
* Replace
the fuse.
5
* If the new fuse blows again, the appropraite circuit should be checked
411111PIECRE /No. 14
OX1-HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
50X1-HUM
- 435 -
No,
,
Nature of fault
Cause
Method of
elimination
14
No + 160 V and 45 V
(supply voltages) in the
receiver.
Blown right-hand fuse
in Block 10
* Replace
the fuse.
,
15
No ? 60 V line circuit
supply voltages
Blown fuse in. Block
20
1
* Replace
the fuse.
16
No receiver, transmitter
or line circuit supply
voltage, or too low cupply
voltage.
Defective vibrator
of the vibrator
converter concerned.
Replace the
vfbrator,
17
One of the pilot 1.!mlas on
Block 3 lights up.
__--
Blown fuses
* Replace
the fuse.
18
After the batteries are
connected for charging,
the charging panel ammeter
pointer does not deflects
Engine revolutions are
normal.
Generator voltage too
law, causing the
reverse current relay
to be inactive0
'Increase the
generator
voltage by
raising the
field current
19
After the batteries are
connected for charging, the
pilot lamp on the charging
panel does not light up.
Blown fuse.
* Replace
the fuse,
20
No voltage from the GSK
1500 generator.
1
1
No excitation in the
generator. Break in
.
the field circuit,
Check the
field circuit
and remove
the defect.
21
Considerable fluctuations
of the generator voltage
and charging current during
battery charging
Sparking at the gen-
erator brushes due to
dirty commutator or
insufficient contact.
Clean the
commutator.
Adjust brush-
es correctly.
22
Insufficient power of the
petrol engine of the mobile
generator.
Dirt in the petrol
pipe or in the par-
buretter. Carbon on
the sparking plugs
Clean the pet-
rd l pipe and
the carburet-
ter. Re-
place spark-
ing plugs.
* If the new fuse blows again) the appropriate circuit should be checked.50X1
-4101SECRET
/ No. 23
50X1-HUN
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
411110SECREIr
-136-
50X1 -HUM
R
11.o.,
Nature of fault
Cause
Method
elimination
23
White pilot lamp on the
mains attachment does
not light up.
No mains voltage, or
burnt-out pilot lamp
bulb.
Switch over
to battery
power supply
Find the
reason of
mains vol-
tage fail-
ure.
1
White pilot lamp on the
mains attachment lights
up,
Blown fuse.
.
* Replace
the fuse.
?
25
1
1

Voltmeter does not show
any voltage. Green
pilot lamp on the mains
attachment lights up,
Break in the volt-
meter circuit,
. Check and
repair the
defect.
26
I When the instrument for
the telegraph channel
and. relay adjustment is
switched on, the pilot
lamp does not light up
and the telegraph pulse
generator does not
operate.
Break in the power
supply cord, Blown
fuse
Repair the
cord. *Re_
place the '
fuse.
27
The telegraph pulse
generator of the instru-
ment for the telegraph
channel and relay adjust- ,
ment does not operate.
Contacts in one
the RP-4 relays are
sticking.
Replace the
relay.
* If the neu fuse blows again, the appropriate circuit should be checked.
50X1 -HUM
50X1
411WSECRE
Chapter
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1 -HUM
... 137 ?
CHAPTER IV
MEASUREMENT OF THE BASIC PARAMETERS OF THE STATION
1. Measurement of the Transmitter Power
545. The transmitter power is measured at rated voltages of the
primary power supply sources.
546. For the purpose of the transmitter power measurement, a dummy
aerial should be connected at the transmitter output.
547. Prior to the measurement, the transmitter should be tuned for
maximum output power. The transmitter loaded with a dummy aerial is tuned
by means of the knob marked "Obwod wyjsciowy" LITUtput circuitf to the
minimum Of the valve anode current. This current is measured with the
instrument located on Block 1, when the left?hand switch is set to the
position "Nad.".elransmitterf, and the right?hand switch to the position
548. The power is measured indirectly by the measurement of the high
frequency voltage across the dummy aerial, with the help of a thermionic
voltmeter type WKS-7.
549. The power value is obtained from the expression:
p _ V2
where: P . transmitter power in watts,
V = measured voltage in volts,
R . impedance of the dummy aerial, equal to 75 ohms.
550. To make the measurement of the high frequency voltage possible,
there is a special hole in the dummy aerial shield. When measuring the
voltage, the tip "W" of the voltmeter probe should be inserted through this
hole in order to contact the dummy aerial, and the terminal "Z" should be
applied to the shield of the aerial.
551. When measuring high frequency voltages, one must not use
? long leads.
trap SECRET
/552.
50X1 -HUN
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 138 -
552. The transmitter power should be measured at three points of
u'he frequency range.
553. The power delivered by the transmitter to the station aerial,
or to the dummy aerial may also be measured with the transmitted power
meter, which has a scale calibrated directly in watts.
2. Measurement of the Aerial Feeder Efficiency
554. The aerial feeder efficiency factor is the ratio of the
power P2 at the output of the feeder loaded with the aerial to the input
power Pl.
= P2 .
P1
This factor is usually expressed as a percentage;
% . P2 x100.
P1
555. The measurement of the efficiency factor ii consists of the
measurement of power at the input and at the output of the feeder.
556. The feeder efficiency factor is measured in the following way:
- one measures the power P1 consumed by the dummy aerial when
connected directly to the transmitter output;
- one measures the power P2 consumed by the dummy aerial when
connected to the transmitter through the aerial feeder;
- one calculates the efficiency factor. The efficiency factoril
can be measured by means of the thermionic voltmeter type WKS-71
ar by means of the transmitted power meter.
3. Mdasurement of the Receiver-Sensitivity
557. The receiver sensitivity is equal to the lowest high frequency
signal voltage value at the receiver input, which would give at the output
of the telephone channel a ratio: Vsignal _ 20 when the frequency
V .
noise 50X1 -HUM
50X1
deviation is 6 kc/s.
50X1 -HUM
AP SECRET
/558.
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECREV
? ,?
50X1-HUM
558. The receiver sensitivity both for the first and for the second
7:elephone channel is measured in the following ways
- when the station is connected for "self-contained!' operation
adjust the rated output level (105 mV across 600 ohms load)
with the aid of the station instruments, or by means of a
thermionic voltmeter connected to the output of the telephone
channel.
switch off and disconnect the transmitter.
- disconnect the aerial feeder from the receiver, and apply to
the receiver input from the generator (GSS) an unmodulaced
signal of the same frequency as the frequency to which the
receiver is tuned.
- connect a sensitive thermionic voltmeter, or a psophometer
to the telephone channel output loaded with 600 ohms.
- set the signal generator GSS output voltage value to obtain
5 mV noise voltage at the output of the telephone channel.
The generator GSS should be tuned to the receiver frequency
for minimum noise voltage value at the telephone channel output.
The high frequency signal voltage at the output of the generator
GSS, giving 5 mV noise voltage at the output of the telephone
channel, and expressed in micro-volts, corresponds to the
receiver sensitivity value.
4. Determination of the Operating Level S2Illaa_a121:_(the.
Overall Attenuation) in the Telephone Channels by means
of the Station Instruments.
559. The operating level setting error (the overall attenuation) in
the telephone channels is determined by comparing the readings of the
station instruments with the readings of the instruments in the measuring
case 5alizka pomiarowg type "Ift".
111106SECRE7
/560.
50X1-HUM
50X1
L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
-140-
50X1 -HUM
560. To determine this error, one should:
- when the station is connected for "self-contained" operation,
or when it operates with another station, set the output level at
the output of the telephone channels in (both directions) to
the normal value with the aid of the station instruments;
- on the transmitting side, at the input of the telephone channel
apply from the measuring case a voltage of a frequency of
800 c/s and a level of -1 N.;
4110 on the receiving side, remove the receiving relay and measure
with the help of the measuring case the output level at the
output of the telephone channel, comparing it with the rated out
put level. The difference between the two values gives the
operating level setting error;
- the overall attenuation of the telephone channels is deter-
mined by the difference between the levels measured at the
transmitting and at the receiving end of the channel.
Remarks
1) The normal telephone channel output level in a two-wire circuit
? is -2 N. (105 mV across a 600 ohms load).
The overall attenuation in the telephone channel in a two-wire
circuit is 1 N.
3) The overall attenuation setting error when adjusted by means of
the station instruments should not exceed ?0.2 N.
5. Cross-Talk Measurement
561. By the term "cross-tale is meant the effect of the penetration
of the modulating voltage from one channel into another.
562. The cross-talk in the channels of the R-401 radio-relay station
is determined by comparison of the results of the psophometric noise measure-
ments in a,channel without cross-talk (no modulation of the other channel)
01# SECRET
/ and in . . . . 50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 . CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
Aik SECRET
50X1-HUM
- 141 -
and in presence of cross-talk (modulation of the other channel).
563. The noise in the telephone channel is measured at the terminals
of the appropriate channel, located on the line panel, with the aid of a
psophomete2. The psophometer is a thermionic voltmeter with a square-
law scale, and a very wide voltage range (from tenth parts of a millivolt
to several volts). Thanks to suitable filters, the sensitivity of the
psophometer allows during measurement for the unequal influence of inter-
ferences originating from different frequencies,
? 564. The block diagram of a psophometer is shown in Figure 88. A
psophometer should not be used as a thermionic voltmeter for the measurement
of voltages of different frequencies, or for the taking of the frequency
response curve, as it indicates the correct voltage only at the frequency
of 800 c/s.
565. The noise voltage measured with a psophometer at the output of
the telephone channel, with a load of 600 ohms, is known as the psophometric
noise voltage.
566. Prior'to the measurements, the Dsophometer should be adjusted
?
?
according to its instruction manual. The cross-talk testing can be per-
formed either with the station connectd for "self-contained" operation,
or with two stations, located at a short distance and both operating as
terminal stations.
567. Prior to the measurements it is necessary ti set:
- the normal frequency deviation of the transmitters with the
normal input levels at the inputs Of the telephone channels;
- the normal telephone channel output levels.
568. The noise (cross-talk) measurement is performed in the following
manner. One of the channels is modulated with a signal of 1000 c/s frequency
and the rated channel input level, taken from an audio frequency generator
50X1-HUM
lefrgSECR!rT
/(or from the
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
40 SECRET
50X1-HUM
-142-
(or from the measuring case type ICz). The modulating signal is switched
periodically on and off. At the opposite station, a psqphometer and a load
of 600 ohms is connected to the output of the other telephone channel. The
noise voltage is measured in presence and in the absence of the modulating
signal in the other channel. The cross-talk voltage is determined from
the following expression:
1-2 2
/U U
cross-talk = ,. - 2 1 '
where: Ucross-talk = psophometric crons-talk voltage;
U2 = psophometric noise voltage in one channel in
presence of a modulating signal in the other
channel
U1 = psopbometric noise voltage in 'one channel after
the modulating voltage in the other channel is
switched off.
6. _Telegraph Distortion Measurement.
569. The telegraph distortions in the channels of the R-401 station
can be measured with great accuracy by means of a sroboscope. By means of
a stroboscope one can also determine the measurement error of the instrument
for the adjustment of the telegraph channels and relays. It 5he strobo-
scopi7 is included in the station equipment. For this reason, before
making measurements, the telegraph channel should be first adjusted by
means of the station instrument (the method of adjustment was described in
Chapter III.). The telegraph channel distortions should :then be measured
by means of the stroboscope.
570. The telegraph distortions should not exceed 10.
4. SECRET
/62m214....1
50X1-HUN
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
Rys. 1. Przeksztalcanie pasma cvzstotliwoLci:
a pasmo cscstotl:woici annals snowy; przetaztaloosse puma CsistotliwO?ci
? ? ,
Figure 1: Transformation of the frequency band
a) speech signal frequency b) transformed frequenCy
band band
50X1-HUM
KEY: (1) lower side band
(2) upper side band
(2). (3) (4)
2.14.442/a ? apea, 2,&747/0
8/1541t18!
1/ 12 tfaz ?
Rys Rwir /trunk p,asta tLL4 kanalow telefonicisych
I 14:egratlfzmych
Figure 2: Distribution of the frequency bands of the
telephone and telegraph channels
KEY:
1st Telephone Channel
3rd Telephone Channel
CRE
,(2) 2nd Telephone Channel ?
:(4) 4th Telephone ChanneI,
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
- SECRET- ,50X1-HUM
?
?
?
(4-)
.??? . 4?1?? ei* ????? OM. %I OM
I?1?4
ti;.,Z11,4;0
, (is) /4:1vfe
(14,
elear/47 AV
(1q) 11,0#
1 (ii?)
LAttitY2
/N4s)
ROO
4f4kA'r
82 OM
eNw./
Sala
(17)
Re
001
14" 0, -r1 7, Wear
nit/4 7 71,01 -
*tit tot IC
Rys. 3. Schemat blokowy nadawcei czqici bioku zwic:olcrotn:,(-71:,4
Figure 3: Block diagram of the transmitting portion of the
multiplexing block
KEY: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1o)
1st Telephone Channel
Handset
Amplitude Limit3r
Low Frequency niter
2nd Telephone Channel
Handset
Amplitude Limiter
Modulator
Band-pass Filter FPI
To modulation amplifier of
transmitter
(21) Band-pass
(11) Transmitter
(12) Sub-carrier frequency (fpn)
(13) 1st Telegraph Channel
kcia
(14) Telegraphic Instrument
(15) Transmitting Relays .
(16) let Local Oscillator_G1
(17) Band-pass Filter FP2- -
(18) 2nd Telegraph Channel
(19) Telegraphic Instrument
(20) 2nd Local Oscillator. G2
inter FP3
_
SfrDrr
50X1-HUM
!let?10,111?00.001,4MMOMNIIPPINN, Prffilligrolwo
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
\
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SICRET
? #(3) ?? ?
,?.
aia ntr
cio
444, 40.
2'? 13 4i) ? - 8).
0.0
I (to) (tt 17
410. 441 a.
(it //:r'' moo fr fiNtitow
1$049 k 100 11(i7)
i;?1
[4- mg,
19
? 07121/1 ?
(9)
Awixis
atiernihr
14, t 4 fi..r.!M,er.+4% VorAce?vry oitarioruirj avid bkiturwi,e'efkr 6t.nierlia
Figure 4: Block diagram of the
multiplexing block
KEY: (1) 1st Telephone Channel
(2)
(3)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) Receiver
Telephone Instrument
Amplifier W
Low Frequency Filter
FMCz1, 0.4-2.5 kc/e
2nd Telephone Channel
Low Frequency Filter
FMCz2
Demodulator
Band?pass Filter FP1,
4.9-7.0 kohil
From receiver output
receiving portion of the
. .1
50X1-HUN
(11) Sub?carrier frequency
(fpn) = 7.4 kcis
(12) let Telegraph Channel
(13) Telegraphic Instrument
(14) Receiving Relays, .
(15) Rectifier
(16) Detector
(17) Amplitude Limiter
(18) Band?pass Filter FP2,
8.4-9.2 kc/s
(19) Band?pass Filter FP3,
12.1-12.4 kcis
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
MIT
2
45/ 0
Rys. 3.. Widino cmUytliwctici na
riA7Y.2 41
;
? //X,
I
11111A1 I
. /1 a 14,41?;
lryjiciu demodulator*
Figure 5: Frequency spectrum at the output of the demodulator
(kHz 40 kc/s)
nit
4,1".??-trAal tt'.4iceraw
gn ? a ?...41
Figure 6: Simplified block diagram of second telephone channel
KEY: (1) Telephone Instrument
(2)
(3)
.(4)
(5)
Differential Transformer TrR
Modulator
Band?pass Filter FPI,
4.9-7.0 kois
To transmitter
Balancing network Rn
Local Oscillator 4 7.4 ko s
Demodulator
Band?pass. Filter FP,
4.9...7 kohl
(10) From receiver
MITT
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
? gnyi _1-41 inn
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
vibussa. I
?
?
?
?
4:1
r z a' laza' -I.C-7;er /!,
C ? aVT' t
Figure 7: The Station in march order
KEY: (1) Mast hoist (4) Case with mast
(2) Output terminal panel sections
(3) Aerial cable entries (5) Battery breather
opening
50X1-HUM
SECtift
Sto:a% ty&clo picAtctr;'yt.)
: arZA St:10.4, 7 ).?
r? Xl. 3 - Ira I.
r tt!.At fl a? WI*
(13:010. 7). 7 MilCiattltt
FL7ure 8: The rack of one half-set
KEY: (1) Rack frame (4) Rectifier unit
1(11lock at3)
(5) ,
(2) Transceiver
(Block 1)
unit
(3) Multiplexing unit (Block 2)
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
EWEN
?
?
5 8
9. Romlieszczenie aparatury w sarnoe'rvacizie:
I pletu A: 2 ? sto ak pdtkcrmpletu 5: 3 ? apari.t li:1,,fonic1ny
? ? .* ce hntowe: 5 zespot spahnowo-elektryci.rky do ladowanla
umu-
- przystawka siecicrwa; 7.? wohonuerz: 3 ? szafka do narzed71
I czci zapasowych; ? zegarek
Figure 9: Location of equipment inside truck
KEY: (1) Rack of half-set A
(2) Rack of half-set B
(3) Telephone instrument TAI-43
(4) Line panels
(5) Petrol-driven generator for
battery charging
(6) Main attachment
(7) Volt-meter
(8) Tools and spares cabinet
(9) Clock
? f ? " ?
* ?
? a.
- t ;:, 7-?-4- cc ttrfrIl
.11 . 8 / 4.? ??..1r et:!??,k 2). 3 ?
?. ?7'..te'rf 11.10: . ? ak:...=..actr...17. 5 ?
? ? ? 7 ? Masz7.1;
448:'.1T-4 8 C=AM-4.
Figure 10: Remote-control equipment of the Station
KEY: (1) Transceiver unit (Block 1)
(2) Multiplexing unit (Block 2)
(3) Bag containing line panel,
handset and cables
(4) Batteries
SECRET
(5) Rigging, in bag
(6) Mast sections, in bag
"(7) Mast hoist
(8) Case with aerial
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
liDeclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? &men ?
- 3 %Mt ..Yage? konstrukcjd krijIzairj. 2 ma=t-)-: ? podnoinak masztu:
Kahle antenowtt: S plerwsay pool= odnigosr: 6 ? drug: pout= odrwow:
trZetl pone= odttastror: 8 ? ergrar ;Kau= odetagtoir: 9 ? kolki odcialowe:
le ? oar:slot dIa =vain sluiltoorero-elektair...nego: 21 ? kabel od zes-pohl
14,011120w0-eiektrycznego
Ri U. Stkcia roralrlicta do pr2cy:
Figure 11: Station deployed for operation
KEY: (1) 'Yagi'-type aerial, of cruciform construction
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Masts
Mast hoist
Aerial feeder cables
First guy-rope level
Second guy-rope level
Third guy-rope level
Fourth guy-rope level
Pegs
(10) Tent containing mobile petrol-driven generator
(11) Power cable from mobile generator
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
I -I 11,JIVI
W Wel
$ ET
?
147.72).777:t
091 10
---??4
i i
I (I 9)

I
t
p_.A.,_ mi.t) oiaz i
(14 a/ ; , ,?
11 _.,....L,......:_..._ ..,.. ___.....F....71..1
1 (2m. 6.4.'s7Z4 144.71/4' i
ZI:j/L2tri1.*! (2.3)
? ' s____ 1 (t 1 i '
61 14-11ar
014 '
Al'elt
r
1i...4.. i..i
(n) (ii) 1.
' ritie14- 1 .'
. , .
t
4.1 ...,141tpi ?.?-isit(171 ,.
21or/
(17) 119
Rys. 12. Scheme blokowy polkombletu przy pracy stacji w charakterze
koncowej
FiRure 12: Block diagram of half-set during operation of
the Station as a terminal station
KEY:
V 1st Telephone Channel
9 Low-frequency filter, 0.4-2.5 ko/s
3 Amplitude limiter
Block 2
,
) Hybrid junction unit UR
(6) Amplifier 1
(7) see (3) ,
(9 Talk-call circuit9
Transmitter
10)
Band-pass filter, 4.9-7.0 kc/s
(11) 0.3-15 kc/s
(12 Aerial
1 13 2nd Telephone Channel
14 Hybrid juncti(n unit
15) Local oscillator G1, 7.4 Z3 1cV:3
16) Transmitter
17 66-70 Mc/e
18 Receiver
19 Block 1
21 1
Transmitting relays 1st Telegraph Channel
(2
22 Local oscillator G2, 8.5 (9.1) kc/s
23 Band-pass filter, 8.4-9.2 kcis
24 Local oscillator G3, 12.2 (12.8) kc/s
(25) Receiving relays
(26) Band-pass filter, 12:1-12.9 kc/s
(27) 2nd Telegraph Channel
?50X1-H UM
t
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA:RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001.0001-5
trititir
I ( 6)
I gia
(1) iff:Vovai .1-0.01
etervIr %)
00)
.7111,10/474ZI I Tr5 I L. _ I _ J
eiwa2tied/ a /fa!
(n) Jr-IYAt IrAc 1(3)
Rys. 13. Schcmat blokowy polkompletu przy pracy stacji w cbarakterze
koricowej z aewnqtrznym zwielokrotnieniem
Figure 13: Block'diagram of half-sei during the operation
of the station as a terminal station with
external multiplexing.
KEY: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Block 2
Amplitude limiter
L.F.Filter, 0.4-2.5 ko/s
1st Telephone Channel
Hybrid junction unit
Block 1
Aerial
Receiver
Transmission
(10) External multiplexing channel
(11) Reception
(12) Wide-band transformer Tr6
(13) Wide-band transformer .Tr7
(14) Transmitter (kHz ko/s)
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Ct 1 (L) awsw
?, M.? ayis 71?
0???????????? ? ????,..0-????; ?77."'
- ? (4+1 ' 7
kJ)
? . 4-7! .17-%1
-12.7. MI (FP e-
0) I? (4).
ej
li L 1 )C-1,..6.4,. 7.1r, 1
; .- f 1
4,4 0 ?
i 1 , j14 44,
I ,.1.).., 0 1 1 4 y
u'I., r_f_l___7_,..,_4--,?4- 4 ...-4 .1
AMA,
.6431 (10 1 .?(4.74); icg4r49): I
.IIC:,,,i4w)
1
ws44,,,
1 i -.4?Lr-j__..r.:
, c 0-7 Zr,. t I .7,,i.p? if? I
- ,.. ,. - I '
ii':?ii i ,,.. -,(4,4.415) 11,5% , . ( . vi-0,y1 ' - -14Y- /--
- 1-4, 1 06: ?
.-
fr7404 ":"" ' 101?Lir - n---ri Art;tzt
1)L-444
?
4 *;* (1-71-1 01r7-,Jririmtlt ii t,
?
4...?,..i
i48.).:41C:i ,
L.-...6;.1 ?1
it. f )
;I Atsy 04
,1
,
r--- r--; - JW410'11
' --/--: - r ? ;
.,- 1.... .0
L77 si
..-- tr?-Lif:74,..,,,,,c1_,,54):,.. :
i
- .j W- ?74i& ii #i-714%,24
(13).: .:2 '' 044 1
4 1
i I
--- - ; .-- ???..., 1.---* I 1-- idk+ f??
(11.
' (9)4.1 4 -" c1. Z .47; . pr..:. It th(J
(8) e____
1 1 omlu.48, i ze
' 4, 1...........1 1 1
01') . ? . (40 44 r--0% I 1
ra 21 41; r-4141'-"124_1!j-j't
i
11
1 (6)/2/ EitA/ ei, . ? " An: g /12/1;i4i 1 ?
(3) 1 Exty ?J ."4".: x4-- L___ili070 1(a)
?
411????????
Rya, 14. Schernat take,wy stetji przy w, araktervi, pf,A.redniej
Figure 14: Block diagram of Station during operation as
repeater station
0
KEY: Half-set A
Half-set B
3 2nd Telegraph Channel
4 Repeating
5 Terminal
6 12.1-12.9 kc/s
(7) Receiving relay
Vlet Telegraph Channel
) 8.4-9.2 ko/s
10) Receiver
? 11 Transmitting relay
12 2nd Telephone Channel
13 4.9-7 kc/s
14 1st Telephone Channel
15 0.4-2.5 ko/s
16 Aerial
17 Block 1
18 Transmitter .
?
193 Hybrid junction unit
20 Talk-call circuit
(21) 4 TF 0
Leaning of (21) and (22) not oleag
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SICHT
?
?
Ity*
L.
Figure 15:
abhor, Medi rOvidakti Prz7 trwrzezzam
efairMirestassie
Block diagram of repeater station with external
multiplexing
KEY:
(1)
Half-set A
(8)
Block 1
(2)
Half-set B
(9)
1st Telephone Channel
(3)
Wide-band transformer Tr7
(10)
Hybrid junction unit
(4)
Wide-band transformer Tr6
(11)
Receiver
(5)
Repetition
(12)
Transmitter
(6)
Terminal operation
(13) Talk-call circuit
(7)
Aerial
ada.,t
M. St:he:mat
L AtatiVat7)
?
bloirviry pracypeilka.mpletu podcza dy?ego odbieru
Figure 16: Block diagram showing operation of half-set during
stand-by reception
KEY:
(1) Aerial
(2) Block 2
(3) 1st Telephone Channel
(4) Receiver
(5) Audio calling signal
receiver
(6) Bell
(7) 2nd Telephone Chann61
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
IDeclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
relICT
Ry.- B:c.;f: r. sun awr_ii)-(xibio7 co:ok :):
Figure 17:
KEY: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Transceiver unit (Block 1)
Tuning knobs
Transmitter output half-connector
Receiver input half-connector
Measuring instrument .
Switches
Vibrator converter fuses
Type of supply switch
"Operation - Stand-by" switch
(9) AIC on-off switch
(10) Potentiometer for
(11) Dial illumination
(12) Calibrator on-off
transmission level adjustment
switch
switch
? 50X1-HUM
(13) Fine-tuning knob for output circuit of transmitter
(14) Front panel
? (15) Bolts securing unit to housing
(16) Dial locking screws
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
OUA I - ri u iv i
?
?
SEPPrv
3
Ryz W4dziz z C 1:413,n3:"
axwcza-c4bicri=oc Po IWO:":
Figure 18: Transeiver unit
viewed from above, with
housing removed
KEY:
(1) Transmitter block
(2) HF Amplifier block of
receiver
Front panel
Measuring instrument
Measuring instrument
switches
(6) Tuning mechanisms
(7) Type of power supply
switch
(8) Chassis
(9) Half-connector Sz-1-1A
(10) Vibrator converter of
transmitter
(11) Vibrator converterof
receiver
(3)
(4)
(5)
Rs 19 Uldok z cou bid= na-
drtrazo-ccNorczego po zdjeodu '
otradotry fplmetworofte ocichyloneY
Figure 19: Transceiver unit
viewed from above with housing
removed (converters tilted back)
KEY:
(1) Transmitter block
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
((1123i
(11 Vibrator converter of receiver
(1
HF Amplifier block of receiver
IF Amplifier block of receiver
Measuring instrument
Instrument switches
Tuning mechanisms
Type of power supply switch
Anti-interference filters
Half-connector Sz-1-1A
Chassis
Front panel
Vibrator converter of transmitter
"Operation - Stand-by" switch
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET l.)1\ I -1-1UIVI
?
?
?
rt ,
?
? ? I. ?
_
4 - .7 7
? - ' ? ' '
. ? ?
c*:: 6 ? . s s
41 ? 7;
. .. 1?'
Figure 20: View from below of
removed (screening
(1) Transmitter block
(2) HF Amplifier block of
receiver
(3) IF Amplifier block of
receiver
(4) HF circuits
(5)
Trimming capacitor for
correcting transmitter
frequency
transceiver unit with housing
covers removed)
(6)
(7)
Trimming capacitor for
correcting receiver frequency
Sz-1-1A half-connector for
Station power supply
(8) Front panel
(9)
Sz-1 -1B half-connector
(10) Potentiometer of the AFC
circuit
(11) Qutput transformer
n F-7,4:-..t.:7-2(
Rys. 21. Sthemat bkcry rzts..1-7112-
I ? gelmratar wzbudzaj. (L.--.1"); 2 ? tLc; 2 ?
? =adulator ettstatak (1.-42; $ ?
6 ? kZ-IM1 ? au:tcla
Figure 21: Block diagram
of transmitter
(1) Master oscillator (L,3) (5)
(2) Separator ffuffer amplifies (6)
(1-2)
(7)
(3) Power amplifier (L-1)
(4) Frequency modulator (L-4)
Modulation amplifier of transmitter
(L-5)
Aerial feeder cable
Aerial
KEY: (1) From multiplexing block
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000016661-5
41.61iti
( ) r
r"---T77;41
Cl/
(Is (if
I -
1 r?
r -
* Lim 4 (2.)
(3)
f C 161 11
00? f.4
! 112# L,
ji I le.ST
1$ 01 I * Ti
????
b.
( rf ? j
L.
if
f 3,1
'HA I r 4...c.?.0171?z;
+
Figure 22: Circuit diagram of the master oscillator
KEY: (1) To switch W-3 (2) To valve 4
(3) To valve 2
7er
12 j 7/
(I) A
I
? .
f2'1.14??
3 frit-
I 2
L
Rs. 23. Scbecut separatora
Figure 23: Diagram of separator
KEY: (1) To switch W-3 (2) To 014
(3) To C22
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
.?
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5.A.,
SECRET
440
L') Artf.4*--c=1 t-C=t ?
?,"
I', I r
tk.f 0.10
t0.1 ( f
?? .410
.A
?
4
A
4
1,41
Ryt. 2.1 Schemat mromsamimoua mory
Figure 24: Circuit diagram of power amplifier
KEY: (1) To W-3
(3) To switch W-2
(2) To aerial
(4) To L-4
Rys. 25. Schemat modulatora ezestatliwoid
Figure 25 Circuit diagram Of frequency modulator
KEY: .(i) To,W-3 (2) To 033
(3) To W-2 (4) To L,5
(5) Dynamic. input capacitance Cwd
SECRET
50X1 -HUM ;
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000175
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 IRA
SECRET. VIVI'
410
41,
Figure 26: Circuit diagram of modulation amplifier
KEY: (1) To R28
(2) To R24
(3) To W-5
(2.)
hiv 044,
(4) To R19 C37
(5) and (6) LF input
(3)
sf.ti
rT4t 124NlIcoorl
Figure 27s Block diagram of receiver
KEY: (1) Aerial
(2) HF Amplifier block
(3) IF Amplifier block
(s)
(4) Aerial cable
(5) Output
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
r -
flys N. Stilvtitost wAsttasIllariss sstslitiej ctystetiassoki
Figure 28: Circuit diagram of HF Amplifier
KEY: (1) To 1st IF Amplifier
- (2) To C16
(3) Input
(4) To C30
-(5) To W-5LY7
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
50X1-HUM
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A0310000716-601:5. Ivi? ?
?
?
R.
a
Scttermci
Figure 29: Circuit diagram of mixer
KEY: (1) To L-7 (2) To HF Amplifier
(3) To W-3E17
44
Rys. 30. Schernat wzmacniacza
pierwszej czestotliwaci paired:AO
Figure 30: Circuit diagram of first IF Amplifier
KEY: (1) To L-8 (2) From mixer
It=
M .. - - -
6,-zo - - ? 11.4 ? -? ? "???41-? V 09
&x.LPar,
41W Yr'
ag - -fait"!
I. _ _
Etyt. 81. Schf=ta01 Wiladu dragiej przemi2ny cigstotliwoixi
agure 31: Diagram of the second frequency conversion
circuit
KEY: (1) To L-212-17 (2) To L-9
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 vi
MRS
?
n
if t 41- Aral &AV
(1) kid V.t.ff (3) (4)
Rys. 32. Sthemat wznacniacza, diugifel enstoUisvici pod),, ?.
Figure 32: Circuit diagram of second IF Amplifier
KEY: (1) To C89
(2) To W-3
? AP-
- ,
? 1
(1)
"
I
441). 4
(3) To R66
(4) To R62
"Riri iv
111P"
!"-1.,7
441
..4. (4 /'
; '.... ,,,-........ . . 1
.4
i . Al, IIRIO Infl?
I ? i?? ,110 Oft? , -.$ i 09
1,......14,41`,.ft-v-ri "7::,--.
dil? .11,
I ? i
' ?.". '*'..C;:)"..."'?41)11 ? .4- Re*M7474.7a ,
Ar.1.04V 16474121
kffirio-)
pi/
TO. 13 sv..,??? t czgitotlivroici
FiKare 33: Circuit diagram of amplitude limiter and frequency.
detector
KEY: (1) To L-11 (2) To LF Amplifier
(3) To =Amplifier
50X1-HUM
SECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
, \
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
4
SECRET
---- -
0
t
i
.
1 t
1 -
fr47
rin.....7zzzi
(2)
I 41 JF 4 I eme141(3)
Flys. 34. Cbarakterystyka czranicz=lica
?
Figure 34: Characteristic of the amplitude limiter
KEY: (1) Uwyj (output voltage) (2) Limiting threshold
( 3) Uwej ( input voltage)
'4TYKI
?
".".'*. 4 a
RIR
'
....,11, > *16 JP . ."*........ ?11.----.. `41'. ..."".????"{
i
i
..:...,.....4.. . 6. .6.,..... ......? II ............ i vs.: it ....... ?-
4.. - 4 ......---...4
1
f
? ?40.6 4........... .........1 4 ...... 4 ........ ? 4.... ..... *. ..............
? no, d it,. i?
.01
..,?,..r......?7.......?.......?
r__1_i_..
..1,
40.1. ????????*.
1 i if.r,
........
.
t.0.11.41......K.O.Mirroan/s10?????,. rr..........
t.allo7+40?104.21 it b 6
...6.....06aW...................... fi?...?.....
4 IX i1 -1 1
-0
Cticratleryst)iti
Figure 35: Characteristic of the frequency detector
(kHz kc/s)
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ?
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
Rys . 36. a t u~ rat a at! acza '7114.).ej czos tOlivroici
Figure 36: Circuit diagram of LF Amplifier
KEY: (1) Output (2) To point 'AI
?-??
-Of
A,A r al
? 4,7 ? (I)
4, ?
titc ea
"ott
1
,S3norr...ttla< 7r-te; kV,
Figure 37: Circuit diagram of DC Amplifier
KEY: (1) To point 'A' (2) To 1,4
SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
StCRET
.50X1 -HUM
Figure 38: Circuit diagram of the Automatic Frequency
Control
KEY: (1) To 145
(2) Dynamic input capacitance Cwd
(3) To W.q.
Ar170' (I)
441
. 40-JEC.:
(L)
:,.(..,4;f;.4.70..??ntrs:0? : sa' .?":177-4:t 4?3
? Figure 39: Circuit diagram of quartz
calibrator
KEY: (1) To IF Amplifier
(2) To HF Amplifier
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SkS161'
?
?
ts
Ttv4 41:42iic
Figure 40: Multiplexing unit (Block 2)
(1) Audio calling signal receiver OZA, of the telephone channels
(2) Transmitting and receiving relays of the telegraphic
channels
(3) Handset socket
(4) Measuring instrument
(5) Step-by-step switch of measuring instrument
(6) On-off switch of instrument
(7) Talking keys of telephone channels
(8) Telephone channel test key
(9) Calling key
(10) "Terminal - Repeater" switches of the telephone channels
(11) Telephone channel type of operation switches
(12) Bolts securing unit to housing
(13) Type of power supply switches of the telegraphic channels
(14) Telegraph channel type of operation switches
(15) Station type of operation switch
(16) Telegraphic channel test keys
(17) Telegraphic channel polarity switch
(18) Front panel
(19) Vibrator converter fuse
.(20) Housing
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
kRys. 41. IN idck z g.6:y bioku
1CZirotni er. a
Figure 41: Multiplexing unit
viewed from above, with
housing removed
3
Rrs, 42. %VW:A : bt.ttNv tzieo-
kzot.f.ler..ia -)o r0.3 cSda
Figure 42: 42: Multiplexing unit viewed
from above, with housing removed
(vibrator converter tilted back)
50X1-HUM
(1) Flexible cables connec-
ting panel with chassis
(2) Chassis
(3) Front panel
(4) Half-connector Sz-2
(5) Half-connector Sz-3
(6) Half-connector Sz-1 -2
(7) Anti-interference
filters
(8) Vibrator converter
(9) LP filters
(10) Calling signal con-
verter
(1) Flexible cables connecting panel
with chassis
(2) Chassis
(3) Front panel
(4) Half-connector Sz-2
(5) Half-connector Sz-3
(6) Half-connector Sz-1 -2
(7) Anti-interference filters
(8) Vibrator converter
(9) LP filters
(10) Calling signal converter
(11) Relay assembly
Relay cover
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
?
?
?
SECRET
Figure 43: Multiplexing unit viewed from below, with
housing removed
(1) Chassis
(2) Front panel
(3) Half-connector Sz-2
(4) Half-connector Sz-3
(5) Half-connector Sz-1-2
(6) Switches
(7) LF Amplifier of first Telephone Channel
(8) LF Amplifier of second Telephone Channel
(9) Audio calling signal generator, modulator,
and demodulator of the second Telephone Channel, and
sub-carrier frequency oscillator
(10) Band-pass filters of the second Telegraph Channel
(11) Receiver and oscillator of the second Telegraph
Channel
(12) Receiver and oscillator of the first Telegraph
Channel
(13) Band-pass filters of the first Telegraph Channel
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
(#1
? 1r ?????????10.1."0 ?
e *.? ,41!
J T,
(I0
4'441
SHAFT
(3),"1. - I..
.2.--ct rir v?i
r .454-1;1. is .1--..-
L7AlLti.;4
Artj 01g7i71 1.4;117)
1
19
jhl)r-ZrAitireq
(0
f2r .
.g:1471.4.-i2i.ttr757r1j,Dire, atiratia40
r Ate- ?I
. ?
WtrAr
?-?7,11;4$1:'' (6)
-
it2.41.77/ AK/ -
11,22,r,257
1.4izar4riV/X/
itmmilo,k=2-17a.teletracmtgo
ihtzfir
(6)
44.. Scheinat bk
?
Figure 44: Block diagram of first telephone channel
KEY: (1) 4-wire transmission: telephone 1.4 N,
telephone 2.4 N
To transmitter
Terminal
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Repeater
Talk-call circuit
To 2nd Telephone Channel
From telephone channel
50X1-HUM
:
(8) From 2nd Half-set
(9) To 2nd Half-set
(10) From receiver
(11) 2-wire: transmission 1 N, reception 2 N;
4-wire reception: telephone 1.4 N, telegraph 2.4 N
(12) Audio calling signal receiver
(13) Switch W-11 1-2 lead (2nd Telephone Channel),
2-4 telegraph lead 4-th Telegraph Channel;
3-4' telegraph lead, 4th Telephone Char i el '
(14) MWgneto calling signal receiver
(15) Audio calling signal generator
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1=litarerer id '
4,z11:6' 50X1-HUM
?
1
.......
,.
4 , 447 itrizzrzarbj20/ (3).
if g 4-P:7,,' 4
gliritAt:JAI,
)11--.., .0 10.-C:a- 4! ?(=)y.f-t=0.1-c=i6ertriTyrrip-t-
, t ? .1
y
I . ..
Figure 45:
Of)
Ii
?Tz7 (s)
.142,1
41A 4.7:n=t elz!= V=nr4k=iimpreg0
Simplified circuit diagram of hybrid junction unit
KEY: 1) Transmitting portion of channel
2 ?To audio calling signal generator GZA
3 To amplitude limiter
4 2-wire line
5 Receiving portion of channel
Figures 46, 47 and 48 - missire
r------1;1 r.t??
AY v
, . ?e..-- L.........4)..1
,...
. ..,
4 t geT-4.1 i
1 ? ,t #
1 ILL.J!' ? .
(3) afF24...............0.,;...
, 042....0_,.....aesetzfrOkitl? 1
(I)
frol:.:::444,21' t211 ....--.4
art/(0
41 Ali
fid
Aitry Pa/
Ric 419.SbemaL boika rez-u indukticn-airego
Figure 49:
KEY:
Circuit diagram of magneto calling signal receiVer
2-wire or 4-wire input
To hybrid junction unit
From audio calling signal generator
Transmitting portion of channel
Bell Dz 1
SECRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Min
50X1-HUM
Er
(3)4iwoli7i7
1//c
04 P1
(I)
P-I4
P
Rys. SO. Schema; generatora
zewu akustycznego #
*NY
Figure 50: Circuit diagram of audio calling signal
generator
KEY: (1) Audio calling signal generator OP1
(2) Call in 1st telephone channel
(3) Call in 2nd telephone channel
(4) Audio calling signal generator GP2
(5) To W-8
?
1
?
J f 1 7 6 1 /1 IIU'il?
L.v:?:11
Rys, St. Mx.rafttcrystylc.a tho=ieria Mu-6w
? 1.0-.
Figure 51: Filter attenuation characteristics
KEY: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Filter attenuation in nepers
let telephone channel
2nd telephone, channel
1st telegraph channel
2nd telegraph channel
Frequency in kcis
- 50X1-HUM
SMET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
77577777:77---7
(4-)zeri
treiaT
? ' 7'
11
Al.11?1474* (24
,ftfo4riei, (3),
elfet4-t 42.17,2,0, S
142:136(9)
tedititim),2
I(
Rys.
J
(Y)
fr.-61-4,7i %,
I-1.11)w: CIO
.r.?-oft 740
..2?41,171,,
50X1 -HUM
?.
4/zow/ip
ScItanAt SkV.--cvy dructvo lrktoriktnriK1
Figure 521 Block diagram of second telephone channel
KEY: (1) From audio calling signal generator
(2) To transmitter
(3) To telegraph channels
(4) To T7
(5) Hybrid junction unit
(6) Receiver
(7) Repeating
(8) From 2nd half-set
(9) To 2nd half-set
(10) From receiver
(11) To Pg (telegraph instrument terminals17
(12) To ZZ (terminals)
(13) To talk-call circuit
(14) Level indicator
(15) Audio' calling signal receiver
(16) Switch W-5: 1-2 line; 2-4 telegraph line
3-4 telephone line
(17) Demodulator
(18) Local oscillator
%MIT
50X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
r
k4;efiAl
SICRET
:TR jr
(24 14
t?-,00.*
?
,(3)
R. $3, Schtmst modulator*
Figure 53: Circuit diagram of modulator
KEY: (1) Input, 0.4-2.5 kcis
(2) output, 4,9-7 ko/s
(3) 7.4 ko/s from oscillator G
is
Tre
4er
If
Rys. 54. Schematy wyjahniajace zasadc pracy modulatora kolow:ep!A
Figure 54: Diagrams explaining the principle of
operation of a ring?type modulator
trtiorr
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A53-100061.0001-5
SECRET
rN,
w
I prkdiw:
Figure 55: Voltage and current graph
(a) Modulating voltage.
(b) Voltage of a frequency of 7.4 ko/s
(c) Amplitude modulated current
Rys. 56. Salernat generatora tskstotliwoici po:incinej
Figure 56: Circuit diagram of sub?carrier frequency
generator
SteRET
56(1 -HUM
iI Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Cs)
.C4 Atutwae
R-s. $7, Schemat blokov4
%TIM
co
Figure 57:
KEY:
(.1?)
(3) ?i
kailiy;s71.?V1
(7)
Rys. 58.
Figure
174,,4)944*(i)
lel?4zeir/e/0001
nadzinika kanalu telegraritznerl
Block diagram of telegraphic channel
transmitter
Matching attenuator
From 2nd half-set
Repetition
Transmission
Transmitting relays
Ultrasonic frequency generator G
Terminal (operation)
To transmitter
Line panel
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) To telephone and telegraph
(0 1020.444/1/
/716(s) (6)
lbfae,Erale
channels
Schemat blokovii kacalu telegraticreq,0
50X1-HUN
58: Block diagram of telegraph channel
KEY:
To 2nd half-set
Receiving relays
Reception
(4) Repetition
(5)
? (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Receiving filter
From receiver
Line panel
Terminal (operation)
To telegraph and telephone channels
Sf
CR FT
50X1 -HUM-
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
SfeRIT
etterkgallt ,alittiltgarWeid 1202k us t ycznej
Figure 59: Circuit diagram of ultrasonic frequency
generator,
KEY: (1) To K 101 (103)
(2) Relay art (P . right-hand contact,
L = left-hand contact)
4
' "Ver/ell
r4se 1.1 Cli..,
lif/eVeAfig -4*
--r# 1'1P
C:=)
4voe
4110/0V
00/
.4" ""' I'Xivitzia(24
onif .
ft,* 14 14,7-...1"
Figure 60: Circuit diagram of telegraph signal
receiver
KEY: (1) Line
(2) Relay arm (P = right-hand contact,
L = left-hand contact)
(3) To 1(101 (103)
SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SICRIT
tIt' i
.I
.....?-.-
....: i 1
4 '
ii ......k....??_,...? Li 4 . H, i
i I
. 45 IN' iit# II?f 4p/4 a Ala(
e
47-1/
iRys. al., Charakttrystyka czcs to t liwc-kiowa odbiorniks kanalu
i. telegralicznego
Figure 61: Frequency characteristic of the
telegraph channel receiver
SICRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
Al (3)
I. rik
SICRIT
^r1f7jt ? ?
(2-)
Weo(11 ?4Y14W
40. zok,
itz
li5FU(04
-L
AV!
-kr
RYL G2. Sawn:tat wlAczezda kanalow telegratacznYth:
Figure 62: Diagram showing connection of telegraph channels
(a) Operation of ST-35 sets with common earth path
(b) Operation of ST-35 sets with separate directions
of transmission and reception
Operation of Baudot.set
(0)
KEY: (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiving relays
Telegraph line
Transmitting relays
Line batteries 227;
? left-hand, P right-hand
STEM
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
oUAl -I-1 U IVI
SECRET
?
?
?
ElvzLA3.: Line panel
(1) Terminals fOr connecting the wire
lines
? (2) Fuses
(1 Strip for writing down code names
(4 Line transformer switches
(5) Bell
(6) Half-connector Sz-5Z17
(7) Half-connector Sz-6
(8) Half-connector Sz-7
.(9) "Earth" terminal
s t/ Men: (?)
#15 -ea
Rys. 64. Schemat bk*crry rasltirdastacj
Figure 64: Block diagram of Station power
KEY: (1) To blocks 1 & 2
(1 Charging panel
(3 Rectifier block
(4) Mains panel
supply
(5) Batteries
(6) Group 1 - Group 2 - Group 3
(7) Input terminal panel.
(8) To 127/220 V Mains
(9) Mobile generator PES-0.75
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
Figure Charging
(1) Voltmeter
(2) Ammeters
(3) Generator field rheostat
(4) Rheostats in the battery
charging circuits
(5) Generator voltage on?off
switch
(6) Battery group switches
Panel
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Voltmeter switch
Pilot lamps
Fuses
Reverse current relay
12 V voltage socket
Flap
Flap catches
1171. c6. pAn-crnky wilrratorowej
Figure 66: Simplified circuit diagram of vibrator converter
fDo Obciazenia" = "to loadf
SUM
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
Figure67:
(1) Transformer knob
(2) Mains on-off switch
(3) Fuses
(4) Pilot lamps
5) Half-connector S2-10
6) Half-connector Sz-4
(1)
..trAtz-4ntat.of
iff4
6.1.1
50X1 -HUM
SIC RET
Mains attachment
(7) Half-connector Sz74
(8) "Earth" terminal
(9) 12 V terminal
(10) 127/220 V switch"
11) Switch locking clip
12) Housing
k,t.c
pnr%
Ry. SS. Schernet przystrwW sfeclowei
Figure 68: Circuit diagram
KEY: (1) To half-set
(2) To half-set
(3) Switch 7
(4) Switch 8
of
A
mains
attachment
fd-n = socke?7
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
?
?
Rys. ?9. B:ck p7ostowniko..v (blok 3):
Figure 69: Rectifier
(1) Front panel
(2) Housing with openings
(3) Bolts securing unit
to housing
unit
(Block 3)
(4) Fuses
(5) Pilot lamps
(6) Potentiometer of the
d.c. amplifier
7
\
11,-1.
stowaikbwP0zdAtsts
Figure
70. livid* &gory bin13 pco-
akittdcmy:
fly&77. W3 z deal bldku, pro-
Itcirekt-N po rifrg-ciu cbudirry:
Figure 71: Rectifier block viewed
70: Rectifier block
viewed from above, with
housing removed
from below, with housing removed
(1)
Front panel
(1)
Front panel
(2)
Transformers
Chokes
(3)
Selenium rectifiers
Paper capacitors
(4)
Sz-3 half-connector
4)
Sz-3 half-connector
(5)
Sz-4 half-connector
6)
Sz-4 half-connector
(6)
Pilot lamps
(6)
Electrolytic capacitors
(7)
Sz-1-3 half-connector
(7)
Sz-1 ?3 half-connector
(8)
Bolt securing block to
(8)
Fuses ?
housing
(9)
Chassis
(9)
IF Amplifier potentio-
meter
(10)
Chassis
50X1-HUM
L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
12
7?149.54
Figure 72: Mobile
(1) GSK-1500 Generator
.(2) 2SD Engine
(3) M-22 "KAT(" Magneto
(4) Screened HT lead
(5) NA-11-10B sparking plug
(6) Decompressor
(7) Silencer in screen
50X1 -HUM
petrol-driven generator
(8) Fan housing
(9) Exhaust pipe
(10) Fuel tank
(11) Anti-interference filters
(12) Base
(13) Securing lugs
(14) Fasteners holding cover
Figure 73: Horizontal radiation pattern of vertical
aerial
smE!
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
ItYs? 74- Pozioma charaisterystyka protnieniowanla antenr posiontej
Figure 74: Horizontal radiation pattern of horizontal '
aerial
(04-ito 1 .... N 1 .
itft
. -,
.,\ 1
? .)
, 2. .,
t,,,, 7r1,7?;.?,' .
,
? 41,4t
\
64, (I)
?
rr: Si 7t
Figure 75: Location of guy-rope pegs
KEY: (i) Peg (2) Mast
Figure 16
r TT
50X1 -HUM
?
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
MITT
50X1 ?HUM
Rya. 77.
Figure 77
^
Figure 78
SECRET
50X1 ?HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
CI
Ry.79. Przyklady
rtItsprawiSiov.'ego rornicszcun:a
nten:
c. b prawiClcwe .Dfltittlefaczersie an
-
ten: c ? r.:eprziofwr torrn:eszczetue
aracn
;
Figure 79: Examples of correct and incorrect placing
of aerials
(a) and (b) Correct location of aerials (c) incorrect location of aerials
Art4.
Si). rnetiNda 4-11,14rd tani A- hr rpoNiptich kl ArWrialoctici_
Figure 80: Example of a methoeof checking for line?of?sight
gfif Lee ?04
8, Sp?,s6b wyrcaexarla puakterx porrocraczyth dla u-ykrelltnia
uk Icrzysrizny eemi
Figure Method Method of plotting auxiliary points for draw
. the aro of the curvature of the earth
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET ?
R. wykNilarda 1117-.NrCiu trAsy ?wrpsikiku br4k'it ,LptrAlnych
?
b:ankit-te.ra-:
Figure 82: Method of drawing the ?profile of the route in
the absence of special tracing forms
6
7
89
Map
Straight line connecting the location points of the
Stations (A-B)
Sheet on which the profile is traced
Straight line connecting points A and B on the sheet
Arc of the curvature of the earth
Line of the profile of the route
Local features (forest, buildings)
Points of location of the aerials
Line-of-sight
144 H44
1 I IllNs
_a.,
ii
Stab Aoore /(81:10m
11 a 1 Avow /co fig/
Rys. 83. Przyklad wykrelIania 1uku krzywirmy ziemi
Figure 83: Example of plotting the arc of the
curvature of the earth
Vertical scale: 1 cm 20 m
Horizontal scale:1 cm m 5 kms
SECRET
50X1-HUN
r.
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
? (I) (1)
) .
?
?
?
?
(3)
.40v
(44 (4)
4.7 ainieen7
It} t4. SITprolgtzetist dxlic23. kotcp:tetlrx? wyrAo&lych 2fz7
Tetramhcyinei
?
Figure 8k: Diagram showing connections of two remote control
sets during repeater operation
KEY: (1) Line Panel (2) Block 1 (3) Block 2 (4) To batteries
? F--,77141 do zegulacil ki=e6-4, telev-eicmych ip7zekainLicow
twidok z przadut
Figure 85: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic channels
and relays (front view)
(1) Instrument (11)
(2) Ballast lamps (barretters) (12)
(3) Pilot lamp (13)
(4) Fuse of the vibrator converter (14)
(5) Instrument on-off switch (15)
(6) Pulse length adjustment potentio- (16)
meter(17)
. .
(7) "Transmission" terminal (18)
(8) "Eartlfterminal
(19
(9) "Reception" terminal 21?:1
(10) Line current test press-switch .
Key No. 12
Key No. 13
Key No.
Pulse transmitter relay
Base for relay being tested
Power supply plug
Front panel
Front panel cover
Cover locks
Housing
50X1-HUM
L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I
1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
1-77:1.y.::-,id :tg,..az?., tti( tsrazi!.sh 1 ra-7,kp
4:widca. ; ut,(4.14 *II:Wm 71 ?
Figure 86: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic
channels and relays (view from above, with
housing removed)
Instrument
Ballast lamps
Pilot lamp holder
Fuse of the vibrator converter
Frequency adjustment potentiometer
Duct capacitors
Strip with resistors
Front panel
Chassis
RKM .0 relay
SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
Rys. 87. PrzyrzAd do regulacji kanalow tele=liticzorth I, pt2ekanfitOw
(widok z dolu- po zdjvciu obudowyr,"
9 1-7 - _ _
0
Input
Figure 87: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic
channels and relays (view from below, with
housing removed)
(1) Vibrator converter (screening cover removed)
(2) Vibrator of the converter
(3) Transformer
(4) Electrolytic capacitors
(5) Frequency adjustment potentiometer
(6) Duct capacitors
(7) Strip with resistors
(8) Front panel
(9) Chassis
(10) Base of the pulse transmitter relay
(11) Base for relay being tested
Filter-
50X1 -HUM
Figure 88: Block diagram of psophometer
HMI
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
11111 SECRET
? 143 ?
50X1 -HUM
Appendix 1
Safety Regulations
1. The commander of the station is responsible for the observance
of safety regulations during the work on the station.
2. Persons who are not part of the duty personnel are not allowed
to remain inside the truck without the permission of the station commander.
3. When replacing fuses, the circuit concerned should first be
de?energised by switching off the respective sources of supply. When re?
placing fuses in the battery charging circuits, the batteries being charged
should first be disconnected.
4. When repairing or checking the blocks removed from The rack, when
checking the power supply circuits, and during other work involving high
voltage circuits, there should be at least two persons present inside the
truck so that one can come to the aid of the other in case of need.
5. When connecting the cable N-4 to a.c. mains it is necessary to
wear rubber gloves, and to work in presence of another person, who can
render assistance in case of need.
6. It is absolutely forbidden to conncct the ac, mains to the
station, and to use it without prior earthing of the motor vehicle.
7. When preparing the battery electrolyte, and when charging the
batteries, the regulations given in the "Service manual for cadmium?nickel
batteries" should be strictly observed.
? 8. The petrol engine tank should be filled with the fuel mixture
only when the engine is switched off. When preparing the fuel mixture
it is forbidden to use a fire or to smoke.
9. When the engine is running, it is forbidden to remove from it
the protective covers.
10. It is forbidden to lower the mast without using the hoist.
11. The technical condition of the guy?ropes, the locking hooks,
and the circles on the rings should be checked before starting the erection
of the mast. 50X1 -HUM
48IWSECR
/Appendix 2
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
ft SECRET
-144-
METHOD OF INSPECTION AND TECHNICAL ?
CONTROL OF THE R-401 RADIO-RELAY STATION
Contents of Appendix 2.
Chapter I General Information
1. Introduction
2. Conditions of storage
Chapter II Inspection of Radio-Relay Station
1. External inspection
2. Inspection of technical condition
3. Inspection of state of completeness
4. Inspection of the state of technical and
operating documents
5. Inspection of storage conditions
Appendix 2
Page
145
145
148
149
149
151
167
168
168
Chapter III Technical ContTol of the Radio-Relay Station 169
1. Measurement of energy drawn from batteries
2. Measurement of energy drawn from A.C. mains
3. Measurement of the high frequency power of
the transmitter
4. Checking the calibration of transmitter
5. Checking the calibration of receiver
6. Checking receiver sensitivity
7. Checking the automatic frequency control
of the receiver
8. Checking the levels in the telephone channels
9. Checking the cross-talk attenuation in
telephone channels
10. Checking the distortion of telegraphic
channels
11. Checking the resistance of the mains
circuit insulation in relation to the
earth potential of the radio-relay station
169
171
172
174
176
178
180
181
184
185
186
Chapter IV Final Remarks 188
111PP SECRET
/ Chapter I
50X1 -HUM
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
Ali SECRET
50X1-HUM
?145?
CHAPTER I
General Information
1. Introduction
1. The radio-relay station is fed from two 5K0-45 12-volt batteriesy
or from single-phase A.C. mains, 127/220 V.
2. The level of interference in the telephonic channels, originating
from the power supply, should not exceed:
in the case of battery power supply; 1.5 mV per octave
3.
exceeds
in the case of A.C. mains supply: 0.8 mV per octave.
The power drawn from the battery by one half-set should not
during listening: 35 w;
during duplex operation (using multiplexing equipment): 75 W.
4. The radio-relay set should continue to operate normally if
the battery voltage falls to 11 V, or if the mains voltage drops by 10 per
cent., of the nominal value.
5. The power of the transmitter at an aerial equivalent resistance
of 75 ohms should not be less than 2 W, while if the battery voltage falls
to 11 V, or the mains voltage by 10 per cent., this power must not be less
than 1W.
6. The combined error in calibration and setting of the frequency
of the transmitter at a temperature of +20?C. t5?C., must not exceed
11:6 kc/s.
7. The total deviation of the frequency of the exciter resulting
from a variation in the battery voltage from 11 to 13 V, or in the mains
voltage by 10 per cent., and the heating of the transmitter during 15
minutes, should not exceed -7.5 kc/s.
8. The variation in the frequency of the transmitter during
standard weather conditions should amount to 6-9 kc/s for each telephonic
channel, and 3-5 kc/s for each telegraphic channel.
111110"2SECRET
/ 9. 50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
SECRET
?
- 146 -
9. The nominal level in the channels at a frequency of 800 kc/s,
using own multiplexing devices, is:
- in a single-track system: input 285 mV (-1 N)
output 105 mV (-2 N).
A variation in the output level within limits of 86 ? 129 mV
t+
k-0.2 N) is permissible:
in a double-track system, without translating the call: input and
output 520 mV (-0.4 N).
A variation in the output level within limits of 425 - 635 mV
(?0.2 N) is permissible:
- in a double-track system, translating the call: input and output
190 mV (-1.4 N).
A variation in the output level within limits of 157 - 233 mV
(t0.2 N) is permissible:
- when using external multiplexing equipment: input 1.16 V (+0.4 N),
and output 105 mV (-2 N) - for an input impedance of 1000 ohms, and
for a deviation which appears during operation in the first channel
in the single-track system.
10. The limiter should operate in such a way that the increase in the
output level should not exceed +0.4 N (in a telephonic channel and a single-
track system) in relation to the nominal value, when the input level changes
from 285 mV to 775 mV.
11. The frequency characteristic of each telephonic channel in rela-
tion to the level at a frequency of 800 c/s should not fall by more than:
- 0.4 N in the 400 - 500 and 2200 - 2500 c/s frequency band;
- 0.3 N in the 500 - 600 and 1800 - 2200 c/s frequency band;
- 0.2 N in the 600 - 1800 cis frequency band.
12. The frequency characteristic in the whole 400 - 2500 c/s frequency
band should not exceed the level for the frequency of 1000 c/s by more than
0.7 N. 50X1 -HUM
13. The inequality of the frequency characteristic of the channel for
external multiplexing, in the 3.5 - 15 kc/s frequency range, should not be
greater than -0.2 N in re ation to the level at a frequency of 9 kc/s. 50X1
SECR
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
SECRET
-147-
50X1 -HUM
14. The non-linear distortion factor in the telephonic channels must
not exceed:
- in a two-wire system; 10% for the input level of 285 mV;
- ir a four-wire system: 4% for the input level of 520 mV.
15. The first intermediate frequency of the receiver is 6.6 mc/s,
while the second intermediate frequency of the receiver is equal to 460 kc/s.
16. The receiver sensitivity, at a deviation of 6 kc/s, a nominal
output level, and the signal voltage-to-noise ratio of 20:1, should not be
less than 2 11V.
17. The output voltage of the receiver is equal to 1.61-0.3 V for:
the middle frequency of the range, deviation of 6 kc/s, and modulating
voltage frequency of 6.6 kc/s.
18. The attenuation of the image frequency should not be less than:
- 22000 (10 N) for the first LP.;
- 65000 (11 N) for the second I.F.
19. The attenuation of signals of an intermediate frequency should
be not less than 125 dB (11.5 N).
20. Receiver selectivity:
- when detuned by 75 to 300 kale, the attenuation should be greater
than 10000 (9.2 N);
- when detuned by over 300 kc/s, the attenuation should be greater
than 125000 (11.5 N).
21. The combined error in calibration and frequency setting of the
receiver at a temperature of +20?C.?5?C. should not exceed ?6 kc/s.
22. The combined deviation of the frequency of the first hetero-
dyne of the receiver, caused by: changes in the battery voltage from
13 to 11 V, in the mains voltage by 10%, and heating of the receiver during
15 minutes, should not exceed t7 kc/s.
40 SECRET
/23.
50X1 -HUI\
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
0 SECRET
50X1-HUM
-148-
23. The automatic frequency control system should ensure a 7-fold
reduction in frequency detuning if this does not exceed i25 kc/s.
24. The thermal frequency factor of the exciter and the first hetero-
+ -6
dyne of the receiver should not exceed the value ?4 . 10 within the
temperature range of from +5 to +40?C.
2. Conditions of storage
25. The radio-relay equipment should be stored in heated garages,
with a relative humidity of 50 -75% and a temperature of +15 to +20?C.
The storage of the radio-relay equipment in premises with a relative
humidity in excess of 75% is not permitted.
26. General instructions on the storage of communications equipment
are contained in "Regulations governing the handling of communications
equipment in the Army", Laczn, 87/59.
1111101ECRET
/Chapter II.
50X1-HLA
50X1
npriassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
ill SECRET
-149-
50X1-H U 1V
CHATTER II
Inspection of Radio-relay Station
4. Ekternal TamasIiaa
27. The purpose. of external inspection is to:
, bring to light any mechanical damage;
- bring to light any shortcomings in maintenance or use;
- carry out repairs or muintenance work in order to remove the
discovered shortcomings or deficiencies.
28. External inspection includes:
- checking the housing of the various instruments;
- checking the state of the cables.;
- checking the aerials;
- checking the handsets and measuring instruments;
- checking the mobile generators and batteries;
- checking the condition of auxiliary equipment.
29. When assessing the external condition, one should take into
account the following points:
- the motor vehicle carrying the relay, the interior of the body-
work, all the components of the station and its equipment
should be clean, and free from any traces of dust, mud, or
other impurities. There should not be any signs of scratches,
dents, or damage to the screening shields or insulating covers
not should there be any looseness in the mechanical mounting
of the individual assemblies of the station;
- the knobs (handwheels) of the equipment should not show any
trace of scratches or mechanical damage, and should rotate
easily and smoothly, without any play on the shafts;
the switches should lock clearly and accurately on all the
operating positions;
44,04ECRET
/- the aerials ..50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
40 SECRET
-150-
50X1-HUM
the aerials of the station, and other elements, which, during
operation, are set up away from the motor vehicle, should be
particularly carefully checked from the point of view of complet-
eress and condition of maintenance. The guy-ropes and pegs,
when packed, should have been carefully dried and protected
against corrosion by careful removal of dirt and drying, while
the metal parts should have been covered with a thin layer of
industrial petroleum jelly,
In their set-up condition, the aerials should also be kept
clean, while the guy-ropes should not be tensioned excessively,
During the autumn and winter periods, all the ropes outside the
vehicle should be cleared of frost and ice deposits, to prevent them from
breaking,
Attention should also be paid to the state of maintenance of
the aerial sockets in the aerial and in the BF transceiver block inside the
motor vehicle;
- the mains and mobile generator power supply cables should be
free from grease or oil. The dirty place should be carefully
cleaned with a dry cloth, whige the half-connectors should be
cleaned from dust and mud,
If the air temperature is ,1.-0 to -45? C., the cables should be
handled carefully, to prevent their being damaged.
30. The result of the external inspection may be regarded as
satisfactory, if none of the above shortcomings have been observed.
31. If the shortcomings and damage make it impossible for the
station to be used normally, it should be sent for repair. The procedure
for this is laid dawn in the "'Regulations governing the handling of
communications equipment in the Army", Fart17", Section I()
SECRET
/ 2. inspection 50X1-H UN/
50X'
neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
40 SECRET
? 451 ?
50X1-HUM
2. Inspection of technical condition
520 The purpose of the inspection of the technical condition is to
check the usefulness of the station for operation in genuine operating
conditions An inspection of the technical condition of radio-relay
equipment should always be preceded by an external inspection.
33. The inspection of technical condition includes:
? checking the supply voltages and the operation of Block 1;
- checking the HP power of the transmitter;
- checking the modulation of the transmitter;
checking the operation of the receiver;
- checking the accuracy of calibration and the frequency correct-
ion of the receiver;
- checking the accuracy of calibration and the frequency correct-
ion of the transmitter;
- checking the automatic frequency control system;
- checking the power supply voltages and the operation of Block 2;
checking the telephone channels;
- checking the telegraphic channels;
checking the battery voltage;
- checking the battery charging system;
- checking thea.c.mains supply;
- checking the battery power supply.
The method of carrying out the technical inspection is
described in paras. 34 ? 52.
34. Checking the supply voltages and the operation of Block 1:
(a)In order to check the supply voltages, one should set the left-
hand switch of the measuring instrument (on Block 1) to the
following positions:
- "4-160 nad." Linad.1 = transmitter ?
- "-25 V"
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
41110 SECRET
50X1 -HUM
-152-
"-25 V";
- "+160 odb," ['odb.1 = receiver];
+12 V";
- "-45 V";
At the rated voltages, the deflection of the instrument pointer
should lie within the limits of the black area marked on the scale.
(b) If the instrument readings lie below the marked area, the
station is faulty0 in this case, one should:
- if the power supply comes from the mains: check the mains
voltage. If this voltage shows the rated value (220 V), then
the station should be sent to the workshops for checking and
possible repairs to the rectifier block;
if the power is drawn from a battery: check the battery
voltage, which should not be less than 11 V. If the voltage
is at its rated value (12 V), the station should be sent to the
workshops for checking the possible excharge or repair of the
vibrator converters. The method of checking the battery
voltage is described in Chapter II, para, 48, below.
In order to check the operation of the receiver valves, the
left-hand switch of the instrument should be set to "Qdbiornik"
["Receiver"], while the right-hand switch should be set
successively to all the positions marked with figures, from 1-2
to 16. These figures correspond to the valve numbering, as
shown on the circuit diagram.
If the valves are to operate properly, the instrument pointer
should lie within the limits of the black area. In position "4", the
pointer is deflected only during the operation of the quartz calibrator:
for this reason, the switch "AZ-wyl."
(0)
position "Al0Z".
"AFC - Off"] should be set to the
sp SECRET
/ (a) .5.0.D.(.1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
-153-
50X1 -HUM
(d) In order to check the operation of the transmitter valves, the
left-hand switch is set to the position "Nadajnik" ["Transmitter"]
and the switch "Praca Dlyzur" ["Operation -,Standby"] to the
position "Pram". The right-hand switch is then set success-
ively to the positions marked with figures from 1 to 6. The
instrument pointer should lie within the marked area on the
scale.
(0 If one of the valves gives instrument leadings below the
marked area, the valve should be changed and the reading
repeated.
35. Checking the BF power of the transmitter.
In order to check the power, the transmitter should be put
on load by means of a dummy. aerial (to be found in the technical equipment),
and the left-hand switch of the instrument should be set to the position
"Antena" ["Aerial"], One should then switch on the power supply of the
station and check whether, at the rated voltage, the instrument pointer
will lie within the marked area on the scale. If, at the rated voltage
of the power supply, the power is less than nominal, one should adjust the
tuning of the output circuit of the transmitter. For this purpose:
remove the seal from the shaft of the trimming capacitor located at the
left-hand side of the panel "Oduod Wyjsciowy" ["Output Circuit"]. Set
the left-hand switch of the instrument to the position Wad." ["Transmitter"]
set the right-hand switch to the figure "1", and turn the capacitor
shaft in such a way as to obtain the minimum deflection of the instrument
pointer (minimum anode current of the power amplifier valve). Having
done this: once again check the power % The check should be.carried out
on three waves of the range (e.g. on wave number 2, 280 52).
36. Checking the modulation of the transmitter:
In order to chekc the transmitter modulation, set the left-
/ hand 50X1 -HUM
SECRET411
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
4111111r SECRET
? 154 ?
50X1-HUM
hand switch of the measuring instrument in the transceiver block to the
position "Wejscie Nadjnika" ["Transmitter Input], and set the switch of
one of the telephone channel in Block 2 (multiplexing block) to the
position "Kanal Radiawy" ["Radio Charmer]," Next, set the call switch to
the position "Zee ("Call"] or "Generator :Kontrolny" ["Test Oscillatoel*
The instrument pointer should be deflected* The amount of deflection
depends on the wave number and 'is proportional to the amount of frequency
deviation* The deviation is set with,the help of the knob "Regulacja
Doziomu" ["Level Adjustment"], which is located on the right-hand side of
the paael, in conformity with the table attached to the panelJ An example
of such a table is given below*
Table 1
Wave
No*
Telephone 1
,
' Telephone 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Power
1 Power
Tmer
Payer
Mains
Battery
Mains
Battery
Mains
1 Battery
Mains
: Battery
-----
8
28
54
66
60
58
62
58
52
j81
78
70
75
70
65
40
35
H 33
...
35
31
30
39
33
32
. 35
32
. 39
Thus, for instance, in the case of wave NO 280 when the station
draws Its power from aa mains and is operating on the first telephone
channel, the instrument pointer shciuld indicate 60 divisions* When power
is dmwn from the battery, and the station is operating on the second
telephone channel, the deflection of the instrument pointer should be
70 divisions*
37. Checking receiver operation*
In order to check the operation of the receiver, the first
and second telephone channel switch should be set to the position
/ "Zenal Radiawy"
050X1-HUN
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
11111.SECRET
-155-
50X1 -HUM
"Kanal Radiowy" ["Radio Channel"], and one should check for the presence
of noise in the ear-piece of the handset. Next, switch on the quartz
calibrator by setting the calibrator switch "Kalibrator Wylaczono"
["Calibrator - Off"; to the position "KalibratorTM, and, turning the "Fala"
['Wave] knob, set the wave to Nos. 1 or 45 (these waves are marked on the
scale with dots). If the receiver is operating normally on these waves,
one can hear in the first telephone channel an acoustic tone varying
within a few ko/s.
If no tone is audible, take action as described in para. 38.
38. Checking the accuracy of calibration and correction of receiv-
er frequency.
The checking of the accuracy of calibration, and the correction
of receiver frequency is carried out in the first telephone channel "Kanal
Radiowy", at rated power voltages, and after the warming up of the entire
equipment for at least an hour.
The calibration check is carried out after disconnecting the
aerial cables from the transmitter and receiver.
One should accurately set on the receiver scale the number of
the wave marked with a dot (No. 1 or i5), and then detune the transmitter
from the receiver frequency by at least 5 numbers. One?should'also switch
off the AFC (setting the 'JZ-wylacZ." switch to the position "wylacz").
The mode of operation switch of the first telephone channel in Block 2
should, for better audibility, be set to the position "4TG".
When the telephone. channel test switch, "Kontrola I-II" is
set to the position "1", receiver noise can be heard in the handset.
One should next switch on the quartz. calibrator (by setting
the calibrator switch to the position "Kalibrator" and, when an acoustic
tone (up to 2.5 kc/s) can be heard in the first telephone channel, then
the calibrating inaccuracy is within permissible ? limits. In this case, a
MP SECRET
/ frequency ...50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
411111$ SECRET
-156-
50X1 -HUM
frequency correction is not required. In the event when no acoustic tone
is audible, this indicates either that the calibration is very accurate,
or that it is very inaccurate,
TO check which of these alternatives is present, one should
turn the "Fala" ["Wave".] knob slowly in both directions around the correct
position marked with a line. If the turning of the knob to the left and
right is accompanied by the appearance of the acoustic tone beginning with
the lower frequencies, then the receiver is calibrated correctly and
no frequency corrections should be made. If, however, no tone is audible,
one should increase the rotation of the knob in both directions, until
the tone is obtained. This indicates a considerable detuning of the
receiver, and, in this case, it is necessary to carry out the frequency
correction. In order to carry out this correction, remove the seal from
the knob "Todstrojenie Heterodyny" ["Heterodyne Trimming"), located on
the right-hand sidewall, and determine on which side of the wave-number
marked with a dot the tone is audible. Carefully set on the scale the wave
marked with a dot (Nos. 1 or 45), and turn the knob of the heterodyne trim-
ming capacitor until one dbtains a zero beat in the channel. If the beats
during the calibration checks were on the side of the lower wave numbers,
then the capacitor shaft should be turned to the right, and if they were on
the side of the higher numbers, then the shaft should be turned to the left.
One should next check the calibration on the second wave mark-
ed with a dot. The accuracy at this point should lie within the per-
missible limits (acoustic tone). Having completed these actions, re-
seal the "Heterodyne Trimming" knob.
Note
I. When changing the heterodyne and the fine-tuning circuit valves
(L-5 and 1,-6)? it is essential to check the calibration and to
carry out frequency correction.
2. Frequency correction may only be carried out by qualified
persons authorised. by the commanding officer.
396 Checking the calibration accuracy and correcting the frequency
50X1 -HUM
/ of the ? ildo
111. SECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
SECRET
? 157 ?
50X1 -HUM
of the transmitter,
In order to check the calibration accuracy and to carry out
frequency correction of the transmitter, one should first carry out a
careful frequency correctien of the receiver,
The check should be carried out as follows: remove the seal
(on the left sidewall) from the knob marked "Generator Wzbudzajacy" ['Waster
Oscillator"]? and put both the receiver and the transmitter on load with
dummy aerials. The receiver, with the 'quartz calibrator switched on,
should be set to the wave marked with a dot,
On the transmitter scale, set the same wave as in the receiver.
If an acoustic tone is heard in the first teLphone channel, no correction
is necessary. If no tone is audible, check for either of the two eventual-
ities, as in the case of the receiver.
If it is found that the transmitter is aetuned, one should
carry out the frequency correction. For this purpose, set on the receiver
the wave marked with a dot, as in the receiver, an turn the shaft of the
master oscillator trimming capacitor until zero beats are heard in the ear-
phone. Next, check the calibration of the transmitter on the other wave
marked with a dot: the calibration accuracy at this point should lie with-
in the permissible limits.
Having cumpleted these actions, re-seal the "Master Oscillator"
Icadb,
40. Checking the automatic frequency control.
The operation of the AFC circuit is checked as follows: set
on the receiver scale the wave marked with a dot; set the mode of oper-
ation switch of the first telephone channel to the position "I". Switch
on the quartz calibrator, set the left-hand switch of the measuring instru-
ment to the position "Odbiornik" PReceiverth and the right-hand switch
to the figure "6" (on the inner circle of numbers). Slowly turn the
receiver knob "Pala" L"WaVe"], until an acoustic toneolose to the zero 50X1
/ beats will
1111P SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
411.SECRET
? 158 ?
50X1 -HUM
beats will be heard in the earphone. Next, switch on the AFC switch, and,
if the pitch of the tone in the earphone remains unchanged, then no AFC
adjustment is necessary.
If the AFC is operating correctly, the current of the valve
L-6 should not undergo any changes when the AFC is switched on or off. If
the current does fluctuate, one should carry out anadjustment of the AFC
circuit.
41. Adjustment of the AFC when the station is powered from a
battery
In order to carry out adjustments to the .0C? remove the seal
from the knob "AFCz" ["AFC"] located on the .",ft wall of the block, and
turn the shaft of this knob (the R[30 ? illegible] potentiometer on the
circuit diagram) in such a way as to obtain no fluctuation of the L-6 valve
current when switching the AFC on or off, while the pitch of the acoustic
tone in the first telephone channel should remain constants Having done
this, re-seal the "AFC" knob.
42. Adjustment of the AFC when the station is powered from a.c.
mains.
The adjustment is carried out in exactly the same way as in the
case of the battery-powered station, except that one should manipulate the
"AFC" kna mounter on the frontal plate of panel 3 (first knob from the
bottom).
Note
In order to prevent the AFC adjustment from being diJturbed
when going over from one source of power to the other, one
should first carry out the adjustment as for the battery
supply, and then as for the mains supply.
43. Checking the power supply voltages and the operation of the
valves in Block 2.
In order to check the supply voltages of Block 2, one should
/ set the ....s
40 SECRET
50X1 -HUM
nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
41111 SECRET
-159-
50X1 -HUM
set the "TF-TG-Przyrzad" ["Telephony-Telegraphy-Instrument"]
switch to the position "TF", and set the instrument switch
successively to the positions "12" and "160" on the inner ring of
inscriptions.
The instrument pointer should deflect to the right, within the
limits of the marked area.
If the instrument reading for the voltage being measured lies
below the marked area, proceed as described in Chapter II, section 34.
CO In order to check the operation of the valves of the telephone
channels, set the "TP-TG-Przyrzad" switch to the position "TF"
and set the instrument switch successively to positions "1,-.1",
"L-2", "L-7" "L-4".
The instrument pointer should deflect
within the limits of the right-hand area marked on the scale.
If, for a given valve being checked, the instrument pointer
falls below the marked area, the valve should be changed, and the reading
repeated.
In order to check the operation of the valves of the telegraphy
channels, the "TF-TG-Przyrzad" switch should be set to the
position "TG"? and the instrument switch should be set success-
ively to the positions marked "L-5", "It-6"? "L-7"0 "L-8".
Further proceedings are the same as when checking the valves in
the telephone channels,
44. Checking the telephone channels.
By checking the telephone channels is meant the checking of
the transmission of a call to the exchange and vice-versa, and operating
"self-contained" [na siebie - see full explanation under (b) below],
(a) In order to check the passage of a call and conversation to
the exchange, one should first connect the 2-wire telephone
lines running from the exchange (cr other sequential switcl5oxi -HUM
41P SECRET
/ device)
os?oit
50X1
npriaccified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
40 SECRET
- 160 -
50X1 -HUM
device) to the terminals of the first and second Channel an
the line panel (the appropriate terminals are marked 1-2 and
5-6). The "Kanal Radiowy - Centrala" ["Radio Channel -
Exchange"] switch of the appropriate channel (I or-II) should
then be set to the position "Exchange", and the "Generator
Ebmiarogy Wywolanie" PMeasuring Oscillator - Call
Signal] switch to the position "Call Signal". The
operator should answer from the exchange, and one should
test with him the speech vality.
A call from the exchange is taken when the "Radio Channel -
Exchange" switch is in the central position. The call is signalled
by -a bell and by the lighting up of green lamps (under the inscription
"Centrala" [vExchange"], depending on the channel).
Note
Instead of the 2-wire telephone lines from the exchange, one
may connect up telephone handsets to the teminals 1-2 and 5-6.
00 By the phrase "self-contained" operation is meant the operation
of a HF transmitter of one half-set with the HF receiver of
the other half-set, or the operation of a transmitter with
a rceiver in one half-set,
During the operation of a transmitter with a receiver of the
other half-set, the transmitter should be put on load with a dummy aerial,
and the receiver should be joined to the aerial by a feeder cable. The
transmitter should then be tuned to the receiver frequency (on any wave)
in such a way that the mode of operation switch "Dymur Praca" ["Stand
by - Operation'] should be set to the position "Stand by". The switch
"Oswietlenie - Wylaczone" 1"Illumination Off"] should be set to the
position "Illumination", the scale locking knobs should be turned to the
left, and the "Pala" PWave"J knobs of the transmitter and the receiver
in the two different half-sets should be set to the given wave number in
1111P1ECRET
such a way 0....
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
te SECRET
- 161 ?
50X1 -HUM
such a way that the vertical line of the wave number on the scale should
coincide exactly with the line on the view-finder [sic - "wizjer"].
Having set the wave numbers, the scale should be locked by
turning the knobs to the right. The switches "TF-41G-4TF" should be set
to the position '2IT", and the "Dyzur - Praca" switch in Block I should be
set to "Trace
In order to send a call into the radio channel, the switch
Radiowy Centrala" ["Radio Channel - Exchange"] should be set to
"Kane]. Radiowy", while the switch "Generator Pomiarowy - 7ywolanie"
["Measuring Oscillator - Call Signal"] should be tilted to the position
"Wywolanie".
A test conversation should then be carried out. Telephone
handsets should be connected to the terminals 1-2 and 5-6 on the line
panel.
The arrival of a call from the radio channel is signalled by a
bell and by the lighting up of red lamps over the Inscriptions "Ronal
Radiawy" (depending on the channel)e
The testing of conversations passing through the telephone
channels is carried out with the help of a handset connected to the
conversation and calling channel, with the switch "Kontrola I-II" ["Test
I-I"] in the position I or II? depending on the channel in which the
test is being made. The handset of the conversation and calling circuit
should be connected to the terminals marked TART" in Block 2.
In the event of operation of the transmitter and receiver in
the same half-set, the switches "2TF-1ITG-4TF" should be set to the position
and the handsets should be connected to terminals 3-4 and 7-8 on
the line panel. The remaining procedure is the same as in the case of
testing of telephone channels during the operation of a transmitter with
a receiver in the other half-set.
41111. SECRET
/ If the call
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
0 SECRET
- 162 -
50X1-HUM
If the call signal and the conversation are not carried by the
telephone channels, one should adjust the latter*
Note
When testing the telephone channels, the remaining switches
should be set as follows: "Retranslaoja - Koncowa" ["Retrans-
lation - Terminal"] should be set to "Koncowa"; the switches
"Etzslotowa - Koncowa" ["Intermediate Terminal") to the
position "Koncowa"; the switch tnvielokrotnienie Wewnetrzne -
Zwielokrotnienie Zewnetrzne - Koncowa - Zwielokpotnienie
Zewnetrane Dia Retranslacji" ["Internal Multiplexing -
External Multiplexing - Terminal - External Multiplexing for
retranslationfti into the position "Internal Multiplexing".
45. The adjustment of telephone channels.
The adjustment of the telephone channels consists of adjustment
of the transmission measuring level and of the reception measuring level.
(a) In order to adjust the transmission measuring level in the I
telephone channel, the switch of the measuring instrument in
Block 2, "TF-TG-Przyrzad" ["Telephone-Telegraph-Instrument")
should be set to the position "TF", and the knob of the measuring
instrument should be set to "Generator Pomiarowy I" ("Measuring
Oscillator 1"). .The switch "Generator Ebmiarowy - Wywolanie"
["Measuring Oscillator - Cali Signal."] should be set to
"Generator Ebmiarowy" and, by turning the potentiometer shaft
of this oscillator, set the instrument pointer to the figure
50. On the (transceiver) Block 1, set the left-hand switch
of the measuring instrument to the position "Wejscie I"
["Input I"J, and on Block 2 set the position of the switch
"Kanal Radiowy Centrala" ["Radio Channel - Exchange"] to
"Ronal Radiowy I", The shaft of the "Ustawienie Poziomu"
['Level Setting"] potentiometer in Block 1 should then be
rotated in such a manner as to secure that the deflection of the
instrument pointer agrees with the table of deviations, attached
to the panel of the given half-set. During this adjustment,
/ a bell
41111111 SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1
nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 163 -
50X1 -HUM
a bell should be ringing on the transmission sides
In order to adjust the transmission measuring level in the II
telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument should be set to
the ppsition nGenerator Pomiarowy II" ["Measuring Oscillator II"], and the
switch "Kanal Pomiarowy II - Centrals"- ["Messuring Channel II Exchange"] to
the position "Kanal Radiowy II" ["Radio Channel II"]. One should no longer
carry out adjustments of the frequency deviation by means of the "Ustawienie
Poziomu" Setting"1 potentiometer, or the "Generator Pomiarowy"
potentiometer in Block 2.
In order to adjust the reception measuring level in the I
telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument in
Block 2 should be set to the position "Poziom I" ["Level V].
(U1)? and the switch "Kanal Radiowy Centrals" should be set
to "Kanal Radiowy". Next, turning the shaft of the potentio-
meter "I", set the deflection of the. instrument pointer to the
figure "50. Abell should ring during the reception of the
mOusuring level.
In order to adjust the reception measuring level in the II
telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument should be set to
the position "Poziom II" (Us), and the adjustment made with potentiometer
"II", similarly as in the first telephone channel.
46. Testing the telegraphic channels.
In order to test the telegraphic channels, one should make
the following reconnections: set the switch of the "TF-TG-Przyrzad"
measuring instrument in Block 2 to the position "TG"; set the "Bodo -
Simpleks ST-35" switches to the position "Bodo" ["Baudot"].. Set the
"Kontrola - Praca" ["Testing - Operation"] switches to the positions
"9.1" and 4208". When the measuring instrument switch is set in the
positions "8.5-9.1" (for the first telegraphic channel), and "1202-12.8"
(for the second telegraphic channel), the pointer should deflect to the
50X1 -HUM
41111. SECRET
/ right
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T002-4-8A631.066010001-5
i4s. 15
? Ifizihrglir 1:272=1"(g)
'
Figure 15
KEY: (1) Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver;
(4) R-401 Half-sets; (5) Acoustic generator; (6) Harmonio
analyser.
", ?
Figure 16
????.?????????????????? 4?10. .11101?114
KEY: (1 Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receive/r;
(4 Stroboscope.
!
,
St CRET
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
OP SECRET
- 10, -
50X1-HUM
right, into the marked area. The "Kontrola - Praca" switches should be
set in turn to the position "8.5" and "12.2" and, at the same settings of
the measuring instrument switch, the pointer should deflect to the left,
into the marked area.
Finally, one should check the deviation of the transmitter
frequency obtained from each telegraphic channel. For this purpose, the
left-hand switch of the measuring instrument in Block i should be set to
the position "Wejscie Nadajnika" ["Transmitter Input"], while the "Kontrola
Fraca" ["Testing - Operation"} switches InIaock 2 should be successively set
to "Fraca". The instrument pointer in Block I should deflect in accord-
ance with the frequency deviation table attached to the panel of the half-
set concerned.
Note
The switches located on the right-hand side of Block 2 should
be set in the following positions: the switches "Akumulatory -
Wylaczone Siec" ["Battery - Off - Mains"] should be in the
"Tottery" or "Mains" position, depending on the source of supply.
The switches "Retranslacja - Koncawa" ["Retranslation Terminal"]
should be in the positiion "Koncowa", and the switches "Nbrmalnie -
Odwrotnie" ["Normal Reverse".] in the position "Nbrmalnie".
47. Adjustment of telegraphic channels.
The adjustment of telegraphic channels is carried out with the
help of an instrument for adjusting telegraphic relays and channelsvwhich
forms part of the technical equipment of the radio-relay station.
In order to adjust the telegraphic channels, the instrument
terminal "Nadawanie" ["Transmission"] should be connected to the terminal
"11" (when adjusting the first telegraphic channel) or "13" (when adjust-
ing the second telegraphic channel), located on the line panel. The
instrument terminal "Odbior" ["Reception"] should be similarly connected to
the terminals "12" or "14", and the instrument terminal "Z" ("Earth")
should be connected to the "Earth" of the line panel. The switches
"Bodo-Simpleks - ST-35" and "Kontrola - Fraca" of the channels being
410 SECRET
/ adjusted
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
?
?
?
- 165 -
50X1 -HUM
adjusted should be set to the positions "Bodo"' ["Baudot"] and 'Trace
["Operation"]. The switch on the instrument, "Impulsy Dwtbiegunowe -
Impulsy Jednobiegunowe" ["Bi-polar pulses - Uni-polar pulses"] should be
set to "Bi-polar pulses The switch ''1Arysylanie - Neutralne.- Proba
Kanalu" ["Sending Neutral - Channel Test.] should be set to "Channel
Test", and the switch "Proba Kanalu Kontrola" jhannel Test - Checking"]
to the posi6ion "Checking".
The instrument should then be connected to the power supply. .
For this purpose, the cord with the jack should be connected to the 12 V
d.o, socket (paying attention to the voltage polarity), and the switch on the
instrument set to "WlaczOne" ["On"]. The knob "Reg. Czasu Trwania
Impulse ['Pulse Duration Adjustment"]? located on the instrument, should
be turned in such a way as to make the instrument pointer oscillate around
the zero readings This will indicate that the duration of the emitted
positive and negative pulses is approximately equal.,
-The switch "Proba Kanalu - Kontrole ["Channel Test - Checking"]
should then be set to the position "Channel Test". The standard telegraphic
pulses will then be fed to the transmitting side of the telegraphic,
channel, while from the receiving side, the pulses will be fed to the
measuring instrument circuit.
In order to adjust the line current in the telegraphic. channels,
one should depress the press-switch "Prad Liniowy" Current"] on the
adjusting instrument, while the testing instrument switch in Block 2
should be set to "Prad Liniowy I" or "Prad. Liniowy II", depending on the
channel being adjusted. Turning the "Prad Liniowy" knob in Block 2,
set the instrument pointer to the figure "25". Having made this adjust-
ment, turn the shaft of the potentiometer "Reg. Czaau Trwania Imp" ["Pulse
Duration Adjustment"] (of the first and second telegraphic channel), so
,as to make the pointer of the milliammeter on the adjusting instrument
/ oscillate around 60060
SECRET
50X1
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
41110 SECRET
?
?
-166-
50X1 -HUM
oscillate around the zero reading.
48. Checking the battery voltage.
Three groups of batteries are provided to supply the pager for
each half-set. Each group consists of two batteries tyi.-e 5NRN-45. In
order to check the voltage of a particular battery, the switch "Agregat -I-
II-III" ["Mobile Generator /2 //2 III"] on the charging panel should be set
tO the position "I", "II", or "III", depending on the group the voltage of
which is to be measured. The voltage is shown by the left-hand instrument
on the charging panel, and should read 12 Vpand not be less than 11 V. If
the voltage is less than 11 V0 the group concerned should be 'Alt on charge
with the help of a petrol-drive generator? type FES-00759
49. Checking the battery charging.
In order to check the charging of a group of batteries, the
PES.-0075 petrol-driven generator should be placed at a distance of 15 to 20
metres from the vehicle, and be connected by an "N-3" cable to the half-
connector on the input panel labelled "12-27 V"-. The battery case covers
should be taken off, and the battery vent plugs removed. The "Wylaczone -
Wlaczone" ["Off - On") switch on the charging panel should be set to "On",
and the "AGR. switch should be set to "AGR." ["Mobile Generator"].
Having started up the generator by turning the knob "Agregat Ftad
Wzbudzenia" ["Mobile Generator - Exciting Current"], the voltage should be
set within the limits of 18 - 20 V, on the voltmeter (left-hand instrument).
Depending on the group being charged, the switch "Ladowanie Wylaczone -
Rozladowanie" ["charge - Off - Discharge"] should be set to "(Marge", and
the "Ptad Ladowania" ["Charging Current") knob on the instrument of the
group being charged should be set to a current of 11.25 A.
If a current of this value cannot be attained, the charging
panel and the mobile generator should be checked in the workshops.. Any
blown fuses on the charging panel should be replaced on the spot.
alkSECRET
/ Note ....0
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?167?
Note
Only two groups of batteries may be charged simultaneously
from one mobile generator.
50X1-HUM
50. Checking the power from ana.c.mains supply.
If the station is powered from the mains with a voltage of
220 V, the switch "127 V - 220 V" on the mains panel should be set to the
position "220 V". Having connected the mains through a cable to the socket
outlet on the mains panel labelled "127 - 220 V"? the switch on the mains
panel should be set to the "Wlaczone" ["On"] position, and the voltage
127 V should be set on the voltmeter by means of the auto-transformer kndb.
The switch "Siec Wylaczone - Akumulatory"blains - Off -
Battery".1 in Block 1 should be set to the position 'T[ains". The
"Akumulatory Wylaczone - Siec" switches in the telegraphic' channels of
Block 2 should also be set to the position "Mains". It is then possible
to test the voltage in Blocks 1 and 2.
Nate
Before connecting up the mains voltage, the vehicle
should be earthed.
51. Checking the power from batteries.
One half-set is powered by one group of batteries. In order to
test this supply, the switch "Siec Wylaczone - Akumulatory" in Blocks 1
and 2 should be set to the position "Battery", and the "Ladawanie
Wylaczone Rozladowanie" ["charge - Off - Discharge") switch on the
charging panel should be set to "Discharge".
52. The radio-relay station may be regarded as technically
efficient when the readings listed in paras. 34 - 51
above have not exceed-
ed the permissible limits Lail dawn for the relay station.
3, Inspection of state of completeness
53. The purpose of this inspection is to check the quantity and
quality of the technical equipment of the radio-relay station.
/ 54,
41111110 SECRET
50X1-HUM
, Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 _
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
? 168 ?
54. The inspection should include:
- a check of the quality and state of maintenance of all the
component parts of the set;
- a comparison of the actual number of items with the number
listed in the equipment log-book.
55. The result of the inspection is regarded as favourable when
the number oZ items composing the set corresponds to the list, and their
quality is satisfactory.
50X1-HUM
4. Ins ection of the state of technical
and operating documents
56. The purpose of this inspection is to check up on the correctness
of upkeep and state of maintenance of technical and operating documents.
57. The inspection should cover:
checking the existence and state of maintenance of operating
manuals, diagrams, and equipment log-books;
- checking the correctness; care, and accuracy of keeping up
entries in the equipment log-books, their content, and method
of making corrections,.
58. The inspection of documents may be regarded as completed
favourably when no document shortages have been found, nor have there
been any shortcomings in the upkeep of equipment log-books.
5. Inspection of storage conditions
59. The purpose of this inspection is to check on the observance
of the principles and conditions of storage of radio-relay equipment.
SO. During the inspection, one should confirm whether the storage
and protection conditions conform to paras. 25 and 26 above.
61. The results of the inspection of storage conditions may be
regarded as satisfactory when no shortcomings have been found in the
storage or protection of the radio-relay equipment.
40 SECRET
clapter III
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
41111V SECRET
- 169 -
CHAPTER III
50X1 -HUM
Technical Control of the Radio-Relay Station
62. Technical control is carried out in order to establish whether
the radio-relay station is fulfilling the basic technical requirements,
and to assess its combat readiness.
63. Technical control includes the actions covered by inspections,
and the following measurements:
- the power drawn from the batteries and from the a.c. mains;
- HF power of the transmitter;
- receiver sensitivity;
- receiver AFC;
- telephone channel levels;
- cross-talk attenuation of telephone channels;
- distortion of telegraphic channels;
- resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to the
earth potential of the radio-relay station.
1. Measurement of energy drawn from batteries
64. The supply of energy from the batteries should conform to point
12 of the TW LI-7, according to which the power drawn by one half-set when
standing by should not exceed 35 W (3 A), with the transmitter switched off,
and 75 W (6.3 A) with the transmitter switched on, when the battery voltage
is 12 V.
The batteries are mounted in a case, and are inter-connected as
shown in the circuit diagram in Figure 1.
65. In order to measure the power drawn, one should open the battery
case, disconnect the end of the positive lead from the battery being tested,
and connect up the positiva terminal of the ammeter to the pofAtive terminal
11111PSECRET
/ of the battery. ...
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
AO SECRET
-170-
50X1 -HUM
of the battery. The negative terminal of the ammeter should be connected
to the lead which has been disconnected from the battery. Simultaneously,
the positive terminal of a voltmeter should be connected to the positive
terminal cf the battery, and the negative terminal of the voltmeter should
be connected to the negative terminal of the battery. The lay-out is
shown in Figure 2. The power supply from the battery to the half-set
should then be ,switched on as described in paragraph 519 Chapter II.
66. Having read off the current and voltage values, the power
being drawn should be calculated from the formula
P . V . I
whores P = power consumed, in Wa'As3
V = battery voltage, in Volts;
I = current drawn, in Amperes.
67. The following instruments should be used for the measurementst
- a d.c. ammeter, with a measurement range not less than 10 A,
and an accuracy not less than 1.5%;
- a d.c. voltmeter, with a measurement range not less than 15 V,
and an accuracy not less than 1.5%.
68. The measurement should be made very carefully, to prevent
the short-circuiting of any of the batteries. After taking the measurement
the case should be closed.
69. The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 1.
Table 1.
No.
Factory
No. of
radio-
relay
half-
set.
Standing by
L
Operating
Temp.
oc.
Humi-
dity
a
10
U in V
I in A
P in W
U in V
I in A
P in W
,
Notes The measurements should be taken with the vehicle and trans-
mitter and receiver scale illumination switched off.
11110SECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/98/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
INPSE7ET
_ 171 _
50X1-HUM
2. Measurement of energy drawn from a.c. mains
70. The power drawn from the a.c. mains by one half-set standing
by (transmitter switched off) should not exceed 65W (0.3 A), and with
the transmitter switched on, 150 W (0.7 A), when the maias voltage is
220 V. The power drawn from the a.c. mains by two half-sets on full
load (the vehicle and the transmitter and receiver scale illumination
switched on, and a call being sent out) should not exceed 340 W.
The permissible power to be drawn from the a.c. mains is
defined in the user instructions of the R-401 radio-relay station; it
is not defined in the TW-/7 - of. paragraph 64 above: this appears to
refer to some general signals instructionS7.
71. In order to measure the power being consumed, one should make
the following connections: the mains cable-end leading to the half-
connector should be connected to the input panel of the vehicle labelled
"127 - 220". At the other end of the cable, one of the.wires should be
connected direct to one of the terminals of the 220 V mains panel, and the
other wire to one terminal of an ammeter. The other +.erminal of the
ammeter should be connected to the second terminal on the mains panel.
Simultaneously, a voltmeter should be connected in parallel
across the mains terminals.
A simplified lay-out of the connections is shown in Figure 3.
One should then switch on the power to the half-set being
measured, as described in Chapter II, paragraph 50, above.
Having read off the current and the voltage values, the power
consumed should be calculated according to the formula:
P .UsI
where: P = power consumed, in Watts,
U = mins voltage, in Volts;
I = current drawn, in Amperes.
411111P SECRET
50X1-HUM
/ The results .
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
40 SECRET
- 172 -
The results obtained from the readings should be entered in
Table 1.
The following instruments should be used for the tests:
- an a.c. ammeter, with a measurement range not less than 2 AI
and an accuracy not less than 1.5%;
- an a.c. voltmeter, with a measurement range not less than 300 V
and an accuracy not less than 1.5%.
50X1-HUM
3. Measurement of the HF power of the transmitter
72. The value of the HF power of the transmitter is defined in
points 16 and 17 of the WT. At normal supply voltages (127 V a.c.,
measured with a voltmeter at the mains panel inside the vehicle, and
12 V d.c. from the batteries, measured with a voltmeter at the charging
panel), the power should be not less than 2 W.
The power measurement may be carried out:
- with the help of an HF power meter;
- with the help of a milliammetor with a thermo-couple and a non-
inductive resistor of a value of 75 ohms.
(a) Measurement with the help of an HF meter:
In order to carry out this measurement, the power meter should
be connected to the transmitter output socket by means of a short length
of co-axial cable (20-30 ems), with a wave impedance of 75 ohms. The
cable length should be terminated at both ends by co-axial half-connectors.
If no such connectors are available, the ccnnection should be
made by means of a.similar length of cable, connecting its inner wire
to the centres of the power meter and the transmitter half-connectors,
while the screening sheath should be connected to the "earth" of the meter
and transmitter half-connector.
A simplified lay-out of the measuring circuit is shown in
Figure 4.
11.0 SECRET
/ The input
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
-173-
50X1-HUM
The input impedance of the meter should be 75 ohms; the power
is read off direct from the meter scale, in Watts.
If the input impedance of the meter is lower, and is 50 ohms,
then a non-inductive resistor of a value of 25 ohms should be connected
in series to the power meter (to the central wire of the half-connector)
while the cable screen should be connected to the "earth" of the meter.
A simplified lay-out of this arrangement is shown in Figure 5.
The read-off power should be calculated from the formula:
Pdz
where: P . true power of the transmitter;
Pdz = numbsr of divisions oa the power meter scale.
(b) Measurement with the help of a milliammeter:
A simplified lay-out of the measurement circuit is shown in
Figure 6. The connection should be made by means of a short length of
co-axial cable of a wave impedance of 75 ohms, tho diameter of its cores
being not less than 0.8 - 1.0 mms.
The connections should be kept as short as possible.
The measurement should be made with a milliammeter with a thermo-
couple, with a measurement range not less than 200 ma, and an accuracy not
less than ?510. The power should be calculated from the formula:
rated level.
P 12 . R
;tore: P . power in Watts;
I . measured current, in Amperes,
R = 75-ohm resistor.
During the measurement, the supply voltages should be at the
In principle, the measurement should be made with the millia-
mmeter. The results of the measurement should be entered in Table 2.
(SECRET
/Table 2.
50X1-HUN
50X1
narlaccifiPri in Part - Sanitized Com/ Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
- 174 -
Table 2
50X1 -HUM
No.
Factory No.
of half-set of tle radio-
relay
Wave No.
I in A
R in ohms
P in W
Temp.
o
Humidity
4. Checking the calibration of the transmitter
73. The calibration error and the re-setting of the transmitter
frequency is described in point 18 of the W-2, according to which the
o o
error should not exceed -6 kcis at a temperatre of +20 C. ?5 C.
In order to check the transmitter calibration, one should use
an interference wavemeter, quartz-stabilised, with an accuracy not less
+ ?3
than +1 .
In order to make this measurement, the transmitter should be
set to the wavelength the accuracy of which is to be checked. The trans-
mitter should then be put on load with a dummy aerial (75 ohms), and should
be lightly coupled (by means of a wire loop) with the interference wave-
meter, as shown in Figure 7, where:
G.3Z. = wide-band oscillator
G.W. = narrow-band oscillator
fx = frequency being measured
fez = wide-band oscillator frequency
fw = narrow-band oscillator frequency
81 . earphones
ffalomierz = WaveLleter; Polkomplet radiolinii = Half-se7b7
The principle of measurement on this type of wavemeter is as
follows: the frequency being measured, fx, is fed to the input of the
wavemeter, while the wide-band oscillator G.Z. of the wavemeter is set
in such a way as to obtain a zero beat in the earphones.
40 SECRET
50X1 -HUM
/This gives ....50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? 175 ?
50X1-HUM
This gives an approximate indication of the frequency of the
transmitter being tested.
Next, one should disconnect the measured frequency fx, and
connect ip the narrow-band oscillator GIN, setting it to zero beat with the
frequency of the wide-band oscillator. One must next determine what
multiple of the wide-band generator frequency fsz (and therefore of the
measured fi.equency fx) is the narrow-band oscillator frequency Lw.
For this purpose, one should divide the approximate frequency
fsz by the frequency Lw. The quotient n obtained from the division is
the required multiple, which should be a whole number. If the quotient
is a fraction, one should take the nearest whole number.
In order to determine accurately the frequency being measured,
the indicated frequency Lw of the narrow-band oscillator should be multi-
plied by the calculated multiple n. For example:
fsz = 69.8 mc/s
Lw = 3172 kc/s
n = fsz = 69800 = 22.04
Lw 3172
If we take n = 22, therefore the measured frequency fx is:
Lx = 22 . Lw = 22 . 3172 . 69,784 Mc/s.
In certain cases this multiple is already calculated and
shown on the instrument scale; if this is so, then it is not necessary
to calculate the multiple.
Knowing the nominal frequency of the transmitter, corresponding
to the wavelength being measured, it is possible to determine the
frequency deviation from the relationship fn - fx. Thus:
fn 69,975 Mc/s
Lx = 69,971 Ific/s
fn fx = 4 kcfs 51197
where: fn = nominal frequency.
4110SECRET
50X1
/The nominal
50X1-HUM
narlaccifiPci in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
et SECRET
?
?
?
?
50X1-HUM
-176-
The nominal frequency of the radio-relay, corresponding to
the wave-length being measured, is calculated from the equation:
fn (Mc/s) = 66 + 75 (N-1) . 10-3
where: N = number of the wave. For instance, for wave No. N.26:
fn = 66 75 . 25 . 10-3 = 67,875 Mc/s
If the calibration and frequency resetting error, at a temp-
+ o
erature of +2J C ?5 C9 exceeds kc/s, the radio-relay station should
be returned to the workshops for calibration correction.
Before beginning the measurement, the narrow-band oscillator
should be calibrated in the range of the frequency measured, with the
help of a quartz oscillator located in the wavemeter.
In view of the fact that the measurement is fairly complicated,
before beginning the measurement one should acquaint oneself with the
wavemeter operating instructions, which should be carefully adhered to.
The measurement way be made with the wavemeter-oscillator taken
from the "WILGA" measuring kit.
The results obtained should be entered in Table 3.
Table 3.
No.
Factory No.
of half-set ,
Wave No.
fw
Mo/s
fx fn-fx
Mcis kc/s
i
Temp.
?C.
Humidity
%
1
5. Checking the calibration of the receiver
74. The error in calibration and in the resetting of the frequency
of the receiver is defined in paragraph 29 of the WT. According to this,
the error should not exceed ?6 kc/s at a temperature of +20?C ?5?C.
In order to make the measurement, one should connect up to
the interference wavemeter the input of the receiver, from which, thanks
to the reverse radiation 5romieniowanie wsteczng of the heterodyne, a
4'signal is fed to the wavemeter input.
SECRET
50X1-HUM
/ The wavemeter
50X1
I I
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
411111FSECRET
-177-
50X1-HUM
The wavemeter should be set to a frequency lower by 6.6 Mc/s
from the frequency of the heterodyne.
The connection should be rade by means Of a co-axial cable,
as shown :!.n Figure 8. If a co-axial cable is not available, the connection
may be made by means of a short conductor.
The transmitter should be switched off (with the "Dyzur - Praca"
5Stand by - Operationg switch in the position "Stand by"). The receiver
AFC should be switched off (the "APCz - Wylaczone" switch in the position
"Wylaczone" L70ff7), and the quartz calibrator should also be switched
off (the "Kalibrator - Wylaczone" switch in the "Wylaczone" f"Offg position).
The wave of which the frequency i to be measured should be
accurately set on the receiver scale, and the reA,eiver frequency deviation
should be measured similarly as in the ease of the receiver (paragraph 73).
In the event when the sensitivity of the wavemeter is too weak,
and it is not possible to obtain a beat of its frequency with the frequency
of the receiver, originating from the reverse radiation of the heterodyne,
the transceiver block should be taken out of the housing of the half-set.
One should then connect up the supply voltage by means of extension cables,
remove the plate screening the resonance circuits located at the bottom
of the transceiver block (see the wring diagram of the HF amplifier circuits)
and couple the wavemeter, by means of a co-axial cable (or a conductor)
to the capacitor C44 (20pF), as shown in Figure 9. The coupling should
be minimal, so as not to influence the frequency of the heterodyne through
the anode circuit of the heterodyne, L12, C43. In order to obtain a
minimal coupling, the co-axial cable (or insulated conductor) should be
placed at a certain distance from the capacitor C44, and then moved
further from it so that a beat can still be obtained in the earphones of
the wavemeter,
lECRET w
50X1-HUM
/ Since the ....
50X1
neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
? 178
50X1-HUM
Since the heterodyne Is operating at a frequency 6.6 Mc lower
than the frequency of the transmitter oscillator, one should set on the
wavemeter a frequency 6.6 Mc/s lower than the frequency set on the
receiver cale.
The measurement of the deviation of the receiver frequency should
be carried out in the same way as for the transmitter (paragraph 73).
The readings obtained from the measurements should be entered in Table 3.
6. Checking receiver sensitivity
75. The receiver sensitivity is laid down in paragraph 25 of the
WT, according to which the sensitivity, at a frequency deviation of 6 kc/s
at the nominal output level and a Signal-to-noise ratio of 201, should
not be worse than 211V in the entire frequency range in both telephone
channels.
In order to make this measurement, one should connect to the
receiver input the output of the HF oscillator, with an output resistance
of 75 ohms, using a co-axial cable, as shown in Figure 10.
The oscillator should make it possible to carry out a smooth
regulation of the output voltage from 1 P. V, and should be tunable within
a frequency range corresponding to that of the R-401 radio-relay station,
i.e. within a range of 66 to 70 Mc/s.
This measurement may be made by means of the wavemeter-
oscillator taken from the "WILGA" measuring kit.
The switches "2TF - 4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to "2TF",
and the transmitter should be switched off (the "Praca - Dyzur"25peration -
Stand byf switch in the position "Stand by").
A 600-ohm resistor should be connected to the terminals 1-2
of the first telephone channel (or 5-6 of the second telephone channel)
on the line panel. Parallel with it, one should connect a thermionic
voltmeter, capable of measurements from 1 mV to 1 V, with an accuracy not
less than ? +
51b.
SIR:311E1r Selectin 50X1
50X1-HUN
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1
?
?179-
50X1 -HUM
Selecting any wave, one should feed to the input of the receiver
from the HF oscillator a signal of a deviation of 6 kc/s. One should
then accurately tune the oscillator frequency to the receiver frequency,
at a maxinum deflection of the thermionic voltmeter pointer.
Using potentiometer "I" or "II" in Block 2 (for the first or
second channel respectively), adjust the level in such a way that the volt?
meter will indicate 105 mV.
Next, switch off the HF oscillator and measure with the voltmeter
the receiver noise level. Switch on the oscillator once more, without
carrier wave modulation, and, using the knob for the smooth adjustment
of the output voltage of the oscillator, set the voltage in such a way that
the noise level Us, measured with the voltmeter, is 20 times smaller from
the Usz noise level measured without the oscillator carrier wave.
The oscillator voltage, in microvolts, at which the signal?
to?noise ratio is 20, will correspond to the receiver sensitivity.
In the event of using HF oscillators of an output impedance
of 50 ohms, one should connect up to the oscinator, in series, a non?
inductive resistor of 25 ohms, as shown in Figure 11.
The measurement should be made in the same way as in the case
of using an oscillator with an outprt impedance of 75 ohms. The true
sensitivity of the receiver is then calculated from the formula:
Ug
rz
LJE
=1.5
where: Ug . oscillator voltage read off from the scale of
the smooth adjustment of the output voltage,
at a signal?to?noise ratio of 20:1.
Before be nning the measurement, one should carefully study
the instructions for use of the HF oscillator. The measurement results
should be entered in Table 4.
4111. SECRET
/Table 4,
50X1 -HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
SECRET
?180?
Table 4
No.
Factory No. of
half?set
Wave
No.
Usz
mV
Us
mV
Ugrz
Us
Temp.
?C.
Humidity
%
Usz
"
50X1-HUM
7. Checking the automatic frequency
control of the receiver
76. The range of the receiver AFC is dc)scribed in paragraph 36,
according to which this control should ensure the reduction of the receiver
frequency detuning in relation to the signal frequency by not less than
7 times, at a detuning not exceeding ?25 kc/s.
In order to coTry out this measurement, the tranIceiver block
should be removed from the half?set housing. , Conm_.ct up the supply voltage
by means of extensien cables, determine 0 ? okreslic, perhaps misprint for
lodkrecicy ? unscre27 the screening plate of the discriminator circuits
(see the wiring diagram of the IF amplifier systems) and connect up the
thermionic voltmeter to the points A ? B, as shown in Figure 12. The volt?
meter should be capable of measuring d.c. voltages from 1 V, and should have
an accuracy not less than 1.5%.
The HF oscillator should be connected to the receiver input
(as shown in Figure 10), making it possible to take readings of the frequency
deviation of up to 25 kc/s from the rated frequency of the oscillator.
In the absence of such an oscillator, connect up the interference wavemeter
used for testing the HF transmitter and receiver.
The measurement may be made with the wavemeter?oscillator from
the "WILGA" measuring kit.
Switch off the quartz calibrator and the AFC (the switches
"Kalibrator ? Wylaczone" and "APCZ Wylaczone" should be set to the
"Wylaczone",trOffff7 position).
Switch off the transmitter (set the switch
50X1-HUM
/ from "Praca ?
401111010SECRE'
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
411111 SECRET
- 181 -
50X1-HUM
from "Praca25peration7 to "Dyzur"25tand by"7). Set any wave number
on the receiver scale and, using the HF oscillator, tune up to the receiver
frequency, so that the pointer of the thermionic voltmeter, connected
up at poilts A - B9 will deflect to zero.
Next, detune by means of the oscillator by 25 kc/s (in either
direction), and note the value of the voltage U1 measured with the volt-
meter at points A - B. Switch on the AFC (setting the "APCz - Wylaczone"
switch to "APC' f7AF0E7),_ and note the value of the voltage 2L, U2.
d = Ul
A
2
where: U1 . value of voltage at the discriminator output,
when detuned from the nominal frequency by 25 kc/s
measured without AFC;
U2 = voltage value at the same degree of detuning,
measured with the AFC switched on.
This value should not be less than 7.
The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 5.
No.
Factory No.
of half-set
Wave No.
U1
V
U2
V
U1
Temp.
oC.
Humi-
dity %
8. Checking the levels in the -telephone channels
77. The value of the levels of the telephone channels is defined
in paragraph 21 of WT. With a two-wire connection, the relative levels
should be:
- input: 285 mV (-1 N);
- output: 105 mV (-2 N);
111110 SECRET
/ while it
50X1-HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
41, SECRET
- 1i2 -
50X1 -HUM
while it is permissible to tolerate variations in the output level within
limits of 86 ? 129 mV (?0.2 N). With a four-wire connection, without the
translation of the magneto call, the appropriate levels should be:
- inputs 520 mV (-0.4 N);
- output: 520 mV (-0.4 N)
while it is permissible to tolarate variations in the output level within
limits of 425 - 635 mV (t0.2 N).
With a four-wire connection, with the translation of the
magneto call, the appropriate levels should be:
- input: 190 mV (-1.A N);
output: 190 my (-1.4 N);
while it is permissible to tolerate variations in the output level within
limits of 157 - 233 mV (?0.2 N).
78. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a two-wire
connection, the switches "2TF - 4TG - 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to the
position "2TF". The transmitter and receiver of the two half-sets should be
tuned to the same wavelength, and should be put on load with dummy aerials.
Connect up to the terminals 1 - 2 of the first telephone channel
(or 5 ? 6 of the second telephone channel) an acoustic generator of an output
resistance of 600 ohms, from which should be supplied a level of 285 mV?
of a frequency of 800 c/s.
?
The accuracy of the generator should not be less than ?5%.
Connect up a 600-ohm resistor to the terminals 1 - 2 (or 5 ? 6)
on the line panel of the second half-set. In parallel with it, connect
up a thermionic voltmeter capable of measuring acoustic voltages from
100 mV to 700 mV, with an accuracy not less than ?5%.
The voltage should be 105 mV, with permissible variation
between 86 ? 129 mV. 50X1 -HUM
A simplified lay-out of the connections is shown in Figure 13.
Note: In order to prevent the bell from ringing during he measure-
ment, one should remove the calling relay from the reception
channel being tested.
41111101ECR!T /79. 1
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
SECRET
- 183 -
50X1 -HUM
79. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a four-
wire connection, without translation of the magneto call, the switches
"2TF - 4TG - 4TF" in Block 2 should be switched to the position "4TG".
Connect un an acoustic generator to terminals 3--4 of the first telephone
channel (or 7 - 8 of the second telephone channel) on the line panel of
one half-bet, and feed a level of 520 mV of a frequency of 800 c/s.
The output level should be measured on terminals 1 - 2 (or
5 - 6) on the line panel of the second half-set, the level should be
520 mV, with a permissible variation within limits of 425 - 635 mV.
The lay-out of the connections to the line panels is shown
in Figure 14.
80. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a four-
wire connection, with the translation of the magneto call, the switches
"2TF - 4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to the position "4TF", and the
measurement made as in the case of a four-wire connection without the
translation of the magneto call.
The input should be fed with a level of 190 mV, with a frequency
of 800 cis. The output level should be 190 mV, with a permissible variation
between 157 - 233 mV.
The results obtained from the three readings should be entered
in Table 6.
Table 6.
Factory
No. I No. of
half-set
Wave
No.
Channel I
Type of
IChannel II
Tamp.
o
C.
Humi-
dity
0
oper. Uwej Uwyj
mV mV
Uwej Uwyj
mV mV
fiwej . input voltage; Uwyj . output voltage7
4111110SECRET
/9.
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
?
?
411111 SECRET
- 184
50X1-HUM
9. Checking the cross-talk attenuation
in telephone channels.
81. The extent of the cross-talk attenuation is laid down in the
general requirements of WT, sec. D and E, according to which the absolute
level of intelligible cross-talk in both telephone channels without retrans-
lation should not be greater than 0.7 mV (-7 N).
The absolute level of unintelligible cross-talk in both the
telephone channels without retranslation should not be greater than 5.2 mV
(-5 N).
In order to carry out this measurement, the switches "2TF -
4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to "2TF". Connect a.5coustiE7
generator of an output impedance of 600 ohms to terminals 1 - 2 of the first
telephone channel on the line panel of one half-set, and connect a 600-ohm
resistor to terminals 5 ? 6 of the same half set, as shown in Figure 15.
On the line panel of the second half-set, connect a 600-ohm
resistor to terminals 1 2, and, parallel with this resistor, connect
to terminals 5 ? 6 a harmonic analyser, or a selective level indicator,
capable of measuring voltages from 0.1 mV$ at a frequency of 400 - 3000 c/s.
Before making these connections, the transmitters and receivers
of both the half sets should be put on load with dummy aerials. One
should also set the normal frequency deviation at nominal input and output
levels, in accordance with the table affixed to the panel of the half-set,
as described in paragraph 36.
Feed a level of 285 mV from the acoustic generator, and carry
out the measurement of the level on terminals 5 ? 6 of the second half-set
using the harmonic analyser. The measurement should be made on several
frequencies, in the 400 - 2500 cis band.
Before making the measurements, one should study the operating
instructions of the harmonic analyser (or selective level indicator).
50X1-HUM
/ In the absence..
4411111104ECRET
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
11110 SECRET
?
?
? 185 ?
50X1-HUM
In the absence of such an analyser, one may connect a thermionic
voltmeter, capable of measurements from 0.1 mV, and of an accuracy not less
4
than ?570.
The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 7.
Table 7.
N o.
Factory No. Modulation
of half?set frequency
cis
Uwej I
(II)
mV
Uwyj II
(I)
mV
Temp,
?C.
Humidity
%
10. Checking the distortion
2f_Llagraphic channels
82. The distortions of telegraphic channels are defined in paragraph
35 of?the WT.
The error in the setting of telegrallic channels to the minimum
distortion by means of the instrument for adjusting telegraphic channels
and relays should not exceed 10%. This condition should 5is.s7 apply to
any RP-4 relays fulfilling the technical requiements.
The transmitter and receiver should be put on load with dummy
aerials and the power should be switched on.
The measurement of the Oistortion should be done with a strobo?
scope, the transmitting section of which should be connected to terminals
11 of the first telegraphic channel on the line panel of one half?set.
The receiving section should be connected to terminal 12 (or 14) of the
other half?set, as shown in Figure 16. In addition, the switches
"Bodo ? Simpleks St-35" and "Kontrola ? Praca" of the appropriate channel
should be set to "Bodo" fBauaot2/ and "Praca" foperationf.
The measurement should be made in accordance with the strobo?
scope instructions. In the absence of a stroboscope, one should use the
instrument for adjusting telegraphic channels and relays, and the measurement
should be made as detailed in paragraph 47. 50X1-HUM
11111PSECRET /The results ... 50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
41111111SECRET
;- 186 -
50X1 -HUM
The results of the mc,asurements should be entered in Table 8.
Table 8
No.
Factory Nos. of
half-sets
Wave No.
Distortion %
Temp.
o
C
Humidity
%
Chan. I
Chan. II
11. Checking the resistance of the mains
circuit insulation in relation to
the earth potential of the radio-
relay station.
81
The resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to
the earth potential of the radio-relay station should not be less than
?
500 kilohms at an ambient temperature of 20?C ?5?C and a relative humidity
of 95% t3%.
In normal conditions of use, i.ee at an ambient temperature
of 20?C ?5?C, and a relative humidity of 65 - 75%, this resistance should
not be less than 2 megohms.
In order to carry out this measurement, one should use an in-
ductor megger producing a voltage not less than 500 V, which is connected
into the circuit as shown in Figure 17.
Disconnect the mains cable from the motor vehicle; connect
one terminal of the megger to one of the two knife contacts of the cable
connector on the wall of the vehicle labelled "127-220", or to the mains
socket inside the vehicle. The second megger terminal should be connected
to the vehicle frame. Turn the handle of the megger and read off the
value of the insulation resistance. The readings obtained should be
entered in Table 9.
/Table 9
ECRET
50X1 -HUM
50X1
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
?
4OFSECRET
?187?
Table 9
50X1-HUM
No.
Factory No. of
half-set
Insulation resistance
?in megohms
Teomp.

C
Humidity .
%
84. The radio-relay station may be regarded as technically efficient
if all the parameters measured fulfil the conditions laid down in Chapter I
of the present "Method of Inspection".
50X1-HUM
11.11P?' SECRET
/Chapter IV
50X1
r Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
CHAFER IV
Final Remarks
85. The results of technical inspections are entered in the signals
equipment inspection books, kept up in accordance with para. 365 of
Signals Regulations 87/59.
86. Having completed the technical control on the basis of the
results of the measurements entered in Tables I - 9, one draws up a
Certificate E"Protokor] as indicated in the pro-forma below.
87. The inspections (carried out in full) and technical controls
are also recorded in the equipment log-book.
?
?
11110pSECRET
dimianig
omit
Pr-forma
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
-189-
Pro-forma of Certificate
CERTIFICATE Nbe 00,e0
50X1-HUM
concerning the completion of technical control of the R-401 radiorelay
set, drawn up on
Commission consisting of:
19 0, at (name of unit), by a
Chairman:
Members :
appointed by virtue of Order Noe issued by (state
authority) on 19
The Commission, composed as above, has carried out a control
of (number) of R-401 radio-relay stationso
The control included:
10 An inspection of the radio-relay station
2,, The measurement of the following parameters:
- energy drawn from batteries;
- energy drawn from the mains;
- BF power of transmitter;
- calibration of HF transmitter;
calibration of BF receiver;
- receiver sensitivity;
receiver AFC;
- levels in telephone channels;
- cross-talk attenuation in telephone channels;
- distortion in telegraphic channels;
- resistance of mains circuit insulation in relation to the
earth potential of the radio-relay station;
- measuring circuits;
50X1-HUM
411111PSECRET
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
SECRET
-190-
measuring instruments used;
- short description of measurements carried out;
- tables of results obtained.
50X1-HUM
Final Conclusions
The Certifidate should end with final contlusions. These
shoUld state how many radio-relay stations have fulfilled the technical
requirements. Give factory numbers of the relay stations which have-fail-
ed to come up to the WT standard. Give an assessment of the technical
condition of the radio-relay stations examined, and the state of their
maintenance and operational capabilities undar actual operating conditions.
Give recommendations for the removal of shortcomings and faults which have
come to light.
Signatures of commission:
41110*SECRET
50X1-HUM
50X1
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
WV'S I I IVIVI
#.a,J
# "1 ? a AO: 9,
?Per 1;* If* ?. 4th .r.e
SECRET
at. .440 41. .0 a. .10 WI" MN, ? NW
1) 1 i ? f Q V 0
L. 0 tv.. ....4.,...0.,,,!".?? ?4,,,,,,,,,,,,...,?...,,,,....nov:0-..
- ' ' ? 4 1) V AO ; . w? rtk.e.... ?. 45
?hasossila '? a....
Ziet 1
s e 4. 09 agla 1,, lp , ,, ,,,,,,,,,,no,......,.......,,,s,..., r 44,041.4%, .? ..............
? (I).0. S? VA ., ?? . ? '
. ; 1. I
.....
40
+
tawi
nyz. I
Fire 1
KEY: (1) Sz-8 cable; (2) To charging panel; (3) Group III -
Group II - Croup I.
R ys. 2
Figure 2
?
() :'.7!,'.70,e,fo.wviiivliFieftwitt.k 72/477/470%1ZOLMY(3)
%7s.3
? IF
Figure 3
KEY: (1) Cable from mains; (2) Input panel on cabin wall of truck;
(3) 220 V mains supply panel.
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
HUM
?
4; 21rr,:z.il
Rys. 4, 0")
Figure 4
KEY: HF power meter; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver;
/4. Half-set of radio relay; (5) 75 ohms.
I 7't AT
(I)
Rys. 5
17;iirMAN 1g1'444e.
(4-)
Figure 5
KEY: HF power meter; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver;
4. Half-set of radio relay.
?
Figure 6
KEY: (1) Transmitter; (2) Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay.
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
50X1-HUM
(6)4:p
*746
(.4 c!! 0. 0 (9)
(to)
Figure 7
KEY: 1 Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; (
4 Half-set of radio relay;
6 Narrow-band oscillator;
oscillator frequency; (9) Na
(10) Wavemeter.
?
ittiir,VX147.1'"
( 4-)
2) Transmitter; (3) Receiv r;
(5) Wide-band oscillator
(7) Earphones; '(8) Wide-band
rrow-band oscillator freggency;
. ?
4
itatanAr 447;844d.
, (3) '
Itys. 8
- - --
8.
KEY: 1 Transmitter;?(2,` Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay;
24. Wide-band oscillator; (5) Narrow-band oscillatOr;'
6 Earphones; (7) Wavereter.
SECRIT
50X1-HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010061-5
OLUBUI
?
?
50X1 -HUM
Rys. 9
(t)
mat,
Fi ure
KEY: (1) To mixer; 2 Wide-band oscillator; (3) Narrow-band
oscillator.; (4.) Earphones.
? .10 =',"
Figure 10
KEY: Transmitter; 2 Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay;
HF oscillator; (5) Thermionic voltmeter.
SECRET
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release _2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
OLUIrILI
?
?
,.;.r.,1147:747
CI)
,
50X1 -HUM
&APAW Ara
Rss. It k
Figure 11
KEY: (1) To input half-connector of radio relay; (2) HF oscillator.
Iftys 12
Figure 12
ICY: (1) To 12 amplifier; (J Thermionic voltmeter.
SICRIT
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
?
Figure 13
KEY; (1) Dummy aerial, 75 oluns; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver;
(4) R-401 Half-sets; (5) Acoustic generator; (6) Thermionic
voltmeter.
Vi.nr (1)
RTS. 14
Figure 14.
KEY; (1) Acouotic generator; (2) Thermionic voltmeter.
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
.11,?????????
avia7 im.Evov A:c.-1, NrreXti (I)
Rys.
momigt
(I)
Fi ure 1
KEY: (1) Meager; 2 Input panel on cabin wall of truck.
50X1 -HUM
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5